1 /* Convert tree expression to rtl instructions, for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1988, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
3 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5 This file is part of GCC.
7 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
8 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
9 Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
12 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
13 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
14 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
18 along with GCC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
19 Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
24 #include "coretypes.h"
32 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
35 #include "insn-config.h"
36 #include "insn-attr.h"
37 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
44 #include "typeclass.h"
47 #include "langhooks.h"
51 /* Decide whether a function's arguments should be processed
52 from first to last or from last to first.
54 They should if the stack and args grow in opposite directions, but
55 only if we have push insns. */
59 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
60 #if defined (STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD) != defined (ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD)
61 #define PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED /* If it's last to first. */
67 #ifndef STACK_PUSH_CODE
68 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
69 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_DEC
71 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_INC
75 /* Assume that case vectors are not pc-relative. */
76 #ifndef CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
77 #define CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE 0
80 /* Convert defined/undefined to boolean. */
81 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
82 #undef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
83 #define TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS 1
85 #define TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS 0
89 /* If this is nonzero, we do not bother generating VOLATILE
90 around volatile memory references, and we are willing to
91 output indirect addresses. If cse is to follow, we reject
92 indirect addresses so a useful potential cse is generated;
93 if it is used only once, instruction combination will produce
94 the same indirect address eventually. */
97 /* Chain of pending expressions for PLACEHOLDER_EXPR to replace. */
98 tree placeholder_list = 0;
100 /* This structure is used by move_by_pieces to describe the move to
102 struct move_by_pieces
111 int explicit_inc_from;
112 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
113 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
117 /* This structure is used by store_by_pieces to describe the clear to
120 struct store_by_pieces
126 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
127 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
128 rtx (*constfun) PARAMS ((PTR, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode));
133 static rtx enqueue_insn PARAMS ((rtx, rtx));
134 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT move_by_pieces_ninsns
135 PARAMS ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
137 static void move_by_pieces_1 PARAMS ((rtx (*) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode,
138 struct move_by_pieces *));
139 static bool block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm PARAMS ((void));
140 static bool emit_block_move_via_movstr PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, rtx, unsigned));
141 static rtx emit_block_move_via_libcall PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, rtx));
142 static tree emit_block_move_libcall_fn PARAMS ((int));
143 static void emit_block_move_via_loop PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, rtx, unsigned));
144 static rtx clear_by_pieces_1 PARAMS ((PTR, HOST_WIDE_INT,
146 static void clear_by_pieces PARAMS ((rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
148 static void store_by_pieces_1 PARAMS ((struct store_by_pieces *,
150 static void store_by_pieces_2 PARAMS ((rtx (*) (rtx, ...),
152 struct store_by_pieces *));
153 static bool clear_storage_via_clrstr PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, unsigned));
154 static rtx clear_storage_via_libcall PARAMS ((rtx, rtx));
155 static tree clear_storage_libcall_fn PARAMS ((int));
156 static rtx compress_float_constant PARAMS ((rtx, rtx));
157 static rtx get_subtarget PARAMS ((rtx));
158 static int is_zeros_p PARAMS ((tree));
159 static int mostly_zeros_p PARAMS ((tree));
160 static void store_constructor_field PARAMS ((rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
161 HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode,
162 tree, tree, int, int));
163 static void store_constructor PARAMS ((tree, rtx, int, HOST_WIDE_INT));
164 static rtx store_field PARAMS ((rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT,
165 HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode,
166 tree, enum machine_mode, int, tree,
168 static rtx var_rtx PARAMS ((tree));
170 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT highest_pow2_factor PARAMS ((tree));
171 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT highest_pow2_factor_for_type PARAMS ((tree,
174 static int is_aligning_offset PARAMS ((tree, tree));
175 static rtx expand_increment PARAMS ((tree, int, int));
176 static rtx do_store_flag PARAMS ((tree, rtx, enum machine_mode, int));
178 static void emit_single_push_insn PARAMS ((enum machine_mode, rtx, tree));
180 static void do_tablejump PARAMS ((rtx, enum machine_mode, rtx, rtx, rtx));
181 static rtx const_vector_from_tree PARAMS ((tree));
183 /* Record for each mode whether we can move a register directly to or
184 from an object of that mode in memory. If we can't, we won't try
185 to use that mode directly when accessing a field of that mode. */
187 static char direct_load[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
188 static char direct_store[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
190 /* Record for each mode whether we can float-extend from memory. */
192 static bool float_extend_from_mem[NUM_MACHINE_MODES][NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
194 /* If a memory-to-memory move would take MOVE_RATIO or more simple
195 move-instruction sequences, we will do a movstr or libcall instead. */
198 #if defined (HAVE_movstrqi) || defined (HAVE_movstrhi) || defined (HAVE_movstrsi) || defined (HAVE_movstrdi) || defined (HAVE_movstrti)
201 /* If we are optimizing for space (-Os), cut down the default move ratio. */
202 #define MOVE_RATIO (optimize_size ? 3 : 15)
206 /* This macro is used to determine whether move_by_pieces should be called
207 to perform a structure copy. */
208 #ifndef MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
209 #define MOVE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
210 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN) < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO)
213 /* If a clear memory operation would take CLEAR_RATIO or more simple
214 move-instruction sequences, we will do a clrstr or libcall instead. */
217 #if defined (HAVE_clrstrqi) || defined (HAVE_clrstrhi) || defined (HAVE_clrstrsi) || defined (HAVE_clrstrdi) || defined (HAVE_clrstrti)
218 #define CLEAR_RATIO 2
220 /* If we are optimizing for space, cut down the default clear ratio. */
221 #define CLEAR_RATIO (optimize_size ? 3 : 15)
225 /* This macro is used to determine whether clear_by_pieces should be
226 called to clear storage. */
227 #ifndef CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P
228 #define CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
229 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN) < (unsigned int) CLEAR_RATIO)
232 /* This macro is used to determine whether store_by_pieces should be
233 called to "memset" storage with byte values other than zero, or
234 to "memcpy" storage when the source is a constant string. */
235 #ifndef STORE_BY_PIECES_P
236 #define STORE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (SIZE, ALIGN)
239 /* This array records the insn_code of insns to perform block moves. */
240 enum insn_code movstr_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
242 /* This array records the insn_code of insns to perform block clears. */
243 enum insn_code clrstr_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
245 /* SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS is nonzero if unaligned accesses are very slow. */
247 #ifndef SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
248 #define SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS(MODE, ALIGN) STRICT_ALIGNMENT
251 /* This is run once per compilation to set up which modes can be used
252 directly in memory and to initialize the block move optab. */
258 enum machine_mode mode;
263 /* Try indexing by frame ptr and try by stack ptr.
264 It is known that on the Convex the stack ptr isn't a valid index.
265 With luck, one or the other is valid on any machine. */
266 mem = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, stack_pointer_rtx);
267 mem1 = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, frame_pointer_rtx);
269 /* A scratch register we can modify in-place below to avoid
270 useless RTL allocations. */
271 reg = gen_rtx_REG (VOIDmode, -1);
273 insn = rtx_alloc (INSN);
274 pat = gen_rtx_SET (0, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
275 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
277 for (mode = VOIDmode; (int) mode < NUM_MACHINE_MODES;
278 mode = (enum machine_mode) ((int) mode + 1))
282 direct_load[(int) mode] = direct_store[(int) mode] = 0;
283 PUT_MODE (mem, mode);
284 PUT_MODE (mem1, mode);
285 PUT_MODE (reg, mode);
287 /* See if there is some register that can be used in this mode and
288 directly loaded or stored from memory. */
290 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode)
291 for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
292 && (direct_load[(int) mode] == 0 || direct_store[(int) mode] == 0);
295 if (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, mode))
301 SET_DEST (pat) = reg;
302 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
303 direct_load[(int) mode] = 1;
305 SET_SRC (pat) = mem1;
306 SET_DEST (pat) = reg;
307 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
308 direct_load[(int) mode] = 1;
311 SET_DEST (pat) = mem;
312 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
313 direct_store[(int) mode] = 1;
316 SET_DEST (pat) = mem1;
317 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
318 direct_store[(int) mode] = 1;
322 mem = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_raw_REG (Pmode, 10000));
324 for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT); mode != VOIDmode;
325 mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode))
327 enum machine_mode srcmode;
328 for (srcmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT); srcmode != mode;
329 srcmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode))
333 ic = can_extend_p (mode, srcmode, 0);
334 if (ic == CODE_FOR_nothing)
337 PUT_MODE (mem, srcmode);
339 if ((*insn_data[ic].operand[1].predicate) (mem, srcmode))
340 float_extend_from_mem[mode][srcmode] = true;
345 /* This is run at the start of compiling a function. */
350 cfun->expr = (struct expr_status *) ggc_alloc (sizeof (struct expr_status));
353 pending_stack_adjust = 0;
354 stack_pointer_delta = 0;
355 inhibit_defer_pop = 0;
357 apply_args_value = 0;
361 /* Small sanity check that the queue is empty at the end of a function. */
364 finish_expr_for_function ()
370 /* Manage the queue of increment instructions to be output
371 for POSTINCREMENT_EXPR expressions, etc. */
373 /* Queue up to increment (or change) VAR later. BODY says how:
374 BODY should be the same thing you would pass to emit_insn
375 to increment right away. It will go to emit_insn later on.
377 The value is a QUEUED expression to be used in place of VAR
378 where you want to guarantee the pre-incrementation value of VAR. */
381 enqueue_insn (var, body)
384 pending_chain = gen_rtx_QUEUED (GET_MODE (var), var, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
385 body, pending_chain);
386 return pending_chain;
389 /* Use protect_from_queue to convert a QUEUED expression
390 into something that you can put immediately into an instruction.
391 If the queued incrementation has not happened yet,
392 protect_from_queue returns the variable itself.
393 If the incrementation has happened, protect_from_queue returns a temp
394 that contains a copy of the old value of the variable.
396 Any time an rtx which might possibly be a QUEUED is to be put
397 into an instruction, it must be passed through protect_from_queue first.
398 QUEUED expressions are not meaningful in instructions.
400 Do not pass a value through protect_from_queue and then hold
401 on to it for a while before putting it in an instruction!
402 If the queue is flushed in between, incorrect code will result. */
405 protect_from_queue (x, modify)
409 RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
411 #if 0 /* A QUEUED can hang around after the queue is forced out. */
412 /* Shortcut for most common case. */
413 if (pending_chain == 0)
419 /* A special hack for read access to (MEM (QUEUED ...)) to facilitate
420 use of autoincrement. Make a copy of the contents of the memory
421 location rather than a copy of the address, but not if the value is
422 of mode BLKmode. Don't modify X in place since it might be
424 if (code == MEM && GET_MODE (x) != BLKmode
425 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == QUEUED && !modify)
428 rtx new = replace_equiv_address_nv (x, QUEUED_VAR (y));
432 rtx temp = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (x));
434 emit_insn_before (gen_move_insn (temp, new),
439 /* Copy the address into a pseudo, so that the returned value
440 remains correct across calls to emit_queue. */
441 return replace_equiv_address (new, copy_to_reg (XEXP (new, 0)));
444 /* Otherwise, recursively protect the subexpressions of all
445 the kinds of rtx's that can contain a QUEUED. */
448 rtx tem = protect_from_queue (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
449 if (tem != XEXP (x, 0))
455 else if (code == PLUS || code == MULT)
457 rtx new0 = protect_from_queue (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
458 rtx new1 = protect_from_queue (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
459 if (new0 != XEXP (x, 0) || new1 != XEXP (x, 1))
468 /* If the increment has not happened, use the variable itself. Copy it
469 into a new pseudo so that the value remains correct across calls to
471 if (QUEUED_INSN (x) == 0)
472 return copy_to_reg (QUEUED_VAR (x));
473 /* If the increment has happened and a pre-increment copy exists,
475 if (QUEUED_COPY (x) != 0)
476 return QUEUED_COPY (x);
477 /* The increment has happened but we haven't set up a pre-increment copy.
478 Set one up now, and use it. */
479 QUEUED_COPY (x) = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (QUEUED_VAR (x)));
480 emit_insn_before (gen_move_insn (QUEUED_COPY (x), QUEUED_VAR (x)),
482 return QUEUED_COPY (x);
485 /* Return nonzero if X contains a QUEUED expression:
486 if it contains anything that will be altered by a queued increment.
487 We handle only combinations of MEM, PLUS, MINUS and MULT operators
488 since memory addresses generally contain only those. */
494 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
500 return queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x, 0));
504 return (queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x, 0))
505 || queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x, 1)));
511 /* Perform all the pending incrementations. */
517 while ((p = pending_chain))
519 rtx body = QUEUED_BODY (p);
521 switch (GET_CODE (body))
529 QUEUED_INSN (p) = body;
533 #ifdef ENABLE_CHECKING
540 QUEUED_INSN (p) = emit_insn (body);
544 pending_chain = QUEUED_NEXT (p);
548 /* Copy data from FROM to TO, where the machine modes are not the same.
549 Both modes may be integer, or both may be floating.
550 UNSIGNEDP should be nonzero if FROM is an unsigned type.
551 This causes zero-extension instead of sign-extension. */
554 convert_move (to, from, unsignedp)
558 enum machine_mode to_mode = GET_MODE (to);
559 enum machine_mode from_mode = GET_MODE (from);
560 int to_real = GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode) == MODE_FLOAT;
561 int from_real = GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode) == MODE_FLOAT;
565 /* rtx code for making an equivalent value. */
566 enum rtx_code equiv_code = (unsignedp < 0 ? UNKNOWN
567 : (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND));
569 to = protect_from_queue (to, 1);
570 from = protect_from_queue (from, 0);
572 if (to_real != from_real)
575 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
576 the required extension, strip it. We don't handle such SUBREGs as
579 if (GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (from)
580 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (from)))
581 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode))
582 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (from) == unsignedp)
583 from = gen_lowpart (to_mode, from), from_mode = to_mode;
585 if (GET_CODE (to) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (to))
588 if (to_mode == from_mode
589 || (from_mode == VOIDmode && CONSTANT_P (from)))
591 emit_move_insn (to, from);
595 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode) || VECTOR_MODE_P (from_mode))
597 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode))
600 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode))
601 from = simplify_gen_subreg (to_mode, from, GET_MODE (from), 0);
603 to = simplify_gen_subreg (from_mode, to, GET_MODE (to), 0);
605 emit_move_insn (to, from);
609 if (to_real != from_real)
616 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode))
618 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
619 if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, 0))
622 emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, UNKNOWN);
627 #ifdef HAVE_trunchfqf2
628 if (HAVE_trunchfqf2 && from_mode == HFmode && to_mode == QFmode)
630 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunchfqf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
634 #ifdef HAVE_trunctqfqf2
635 if (HAVE_trunctqfqf2 && from_mode == TQFmode && to_mode == QFmode)
637 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctqfqf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
641 #ifdef HAVE_truncsfqf2
642 if (HAVE_truncsfqf2 && from_mode == SFmode && to_mode == QFmode)
644 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsfqf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
648 #ifdef HAVE_truncdfqf2
649 if (HAVE_truncdfqf2 && from_mode == DFmode && to_mode == QFmode)
651 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdfqf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
655 #ifdef HAVE_truncxfqf2
656 if (HAVE_truncxfqf2 && from_mode == XFmode && to_mode == QFmode)
658 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncxfqf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
662 #ifdef HAVE_trunctfqf2
663 if (HAVE_trunctfqf2 && from_mode == TFmode && to_mode == QFmode)
665 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfqf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
670 #ifdef HAVE_trunctqfhf2
671 if (HAVE_trunctqfhf2 && from_mode == TQFmode && to_mode == HFmode)
673 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctqfhf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
677 #ifdef HAVE_truncsfhf2
678 if (HAVE_truncsfhf2 && from_mode == SFmode && to_mode == HFmode)
680 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsfhf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
684 #ifdef HAVE_truncdfhf2
685 if (HAVE_truncdfhf2 && from_mode == DFmode && to_mode == HFmode)
687 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdfhf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
691 #ifdef HAVE_truncxfhf2
692 if (HAVE_truncxfhf2 && from_mode == XFmode && to_mode == HFmode)
694 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncxfhf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
698 #ifdef HAVE_trunctfhf2
699 if (HAVE_trunctfhf2 && from_mode == TFmode && to_mode == HFmode)
701 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfhf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
706 #ifdef HAVE_truncsftqf2
707 if (HAVE_truncsftqf2 && from_mode == SFmode && to_mode == TQFmode)
709 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsftqf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
713 #ifdef HAVE_truncdftqf2
714 if (HAVE_truncdftqf2 && from_mode == DFmode && to_mode == TQFmode)
716 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdftqf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
720 #ifdef HAVE_truncxftqf2
721 if (HAVE_truncxftqf2 && from_mode == XFmode && to_mode == TQFmode)
723 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncxftqf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
727 #ifdef HAVE_trunctftqf2
728 if (HAVE_trunctftqf2 && from_mode == TFmode && to_mode == TQFmode)
730 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctftqf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
735 #ifdef HAVE_truncdfsf2
736 if (HAVE_truncdfsf2 && from_mode == DFmode && to_mode == SFmode)
738 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdfsf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
742 #ifdef HAVE_truncxfsf2
743 if (HAVE_truncxfsf2 && from_mode == XFmode && to_mode == SFmode)
745 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncxfsf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
749 #ifdef HAVE_trunctfsf2
750 if (HAVE_trunctfsf2 && from_mode == TFmode && to_mode == SFmode)
752 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfsf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
756 #ifdef HAVE_truncxfdf2
757 if (HAVE_truncxfdf2 && from_mode == XFmode && to_mode == DFmode)
759 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncxfdf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
763 #ifdef HAVE_trunctfdf2
764 if (HAVE_trunctfdf2 && from_mode == TFmode && to_mode == DFmode)
766 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfdf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
778 libcall = extendsfdf2_libfunc;
782 libcall = extendsfxf2_libfunc;
786 libcall = extendsftf2_libfunc;
798 libcall = truncdfsf2_libfunc;
802 libcall = extenddfxf2_libfunc;
806 libcall = extenddftf2_libfunc;
818 libcall = truncxfsf2_libfunc;
822 libcall = truncxfdf2_libfunc;
834 libcall = trunctfsf2_libfunc;
838 libcall = trunctfdf2_libfunc;
850 if (libcall == (rtx) 0)
851 /* This conversion is not implemented yet. */
855 value = emit_library_call_value (libcall, NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST, to_mode,
857 insns = get_insns ();
859 emit_libcall_block (insns, to, value, gen_rtx_FLOAT_TRUNCATE (to_mode,
864 /* Now both modes are integers. */
866 /* Handle expanding beyond a word. */
867 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode)
868 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD)
875 enum machine_mode lowpart_mode;
876 int nwords = CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode), UNITS_PER_WORD);
878 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
879 if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp))
882 /* If FROM is a SUBREG, put it into a register. Do this
883 so that we always generate the same set of insns for
884 better cse'ing; if an intermediate assignment occurred,
885 we won't be doing the operation directly on the SUBREG. */
886 if (optimize > 0 && GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG)
887 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
888 emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code);
891 /* Next, try converting via full word. */
892 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD
893 && ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, word_mode, unsignedp))
894 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
896 if (GET_CODE (to) == REG)
897 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, to));
898 convert_move (gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), from, unsignedp);
899 emit_unop_insn (code, to,
900 gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), equiv_code);
904 /* No special multiword conversion insn; do it by hand. */
907 /* Since we will turn this into a no conflict block, we must ensure
908 that the source does not overlap the target. */
910 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to, from))
911 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
913 /* Get a copy of FROM widened to a word, if necessary. */
914 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
915 lowpart_mode = word_mode;
917 lowpart_mode = from_mode;
919 lowfrom = convert_to_mode (lowpart_mode, from, unsignedp);
921 lowpart = gen_lowpart (lowpart_mode, to);
922 emit_move_insn (lowpart, lowfrom);
924 /* Compute the value to put in each remaining word. */
926 fill_value = const0_rtx;
931 && insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_slt].operand[0].mode == word_mode
932 && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
934 emit_cmp_insn (lowfrom, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX,
936 fill_value = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode);
937 emit_insn (gen_slt (fill_value));
943 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, lowpart_mode, lowfrom,
944 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (lowpart_mode) - 1),
946 fill_value = convert_to_mode (word_mode, fill_value, 1);
950 /* Fill the remaining words. */
951 for (i = GET_MODE_SIZE (lowpart_mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD; i < nwords; i++)
953 int index = (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN ? nwords - i - 1 : i);
954 rtx subword = operand_subword (to, index, 1, to_mode);
959 if (fill_value != subword)
960 emit_move_insn (subword, fill_value);
963 insns = get_insns ();
966 emit_no_conflict_block (insns, to, from, NULL_RTX,
967 gen_rtx_fmt_e (equiv_code, to_mode, copy_rtx (from)));
971 /* Truncating multi-word to a word or less. */
972 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD
973 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) <= BITS_PER_WORD)
975 if (!((GET_CODE (from) == MEM
976 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from)
977 && direct_load[(int) to_mode]
978 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from, 0)))
979 || GET_CODE (from) == REG
980 || GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG))
981 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
982 convert_move (to, gen_lowpart (word_mode, from), 0);
986 /* Handle pointer conversion. */ /* SPEE 900220. */
987 if (to_mode == PQImode)
989 if (from_mode != QImode)
990 from = convert_to_mode (QImode, from, unsignedp);
992 #ifdef HAVE_truncqipqi2
993 if (HAVE_truncqipqi2)
995 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncqipqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
998 #endif /* HAVE_truncqipqi2 */
1002 if (from_mode == PQImode)
1004 if (to_mode != QImode)
1006 from = convert_to_mode (QImode, from, unsignedp);
1011 #ifdef HAVE_extendpqiqi2
1012 if (HAVE_extendpqiqi2)
1014 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendpqiqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1017 #endif /* HAVE_extendpqiqi2 */
1022 if (to_mode == PSImode)
1024 if (from_mode != SImode)
1025 from = convert_to_mode (SImode, from, unsignedp);
1027 #ifdef HAVE_truncsipsi2
1028 if (HAVE_truncsipsi2)
1030 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsipsi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1033 #endif /* HAVE_truncsipsi2 */
1037 if (from_mode == PSImode)
1039 if (to_mode != SImode)
1041 from = convert_to_mode (SImode, from, unsignedp);
1046 #ifdef HAVE_extendpsisi2
1047 if (! unsignedp && HAVE_extendpsisi2)
1049 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendpsisi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1052 #endif /* HAVE_extendpsisi2 */
1053 #ifdef HAVE_zero_extendpsisi2
1054 if (unsignedp && HAVE_zero_extendpsisi2)
1056 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_zero_extendpsisi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1059 #endif /* HAVE_zero_extendpsisi2 */
1064 if (to_mode == PDImode)
1066 if (from_mode != DImode)
1067 from = convert_to_mode (DImode, from, unsignedp);
1069 #ifdef HAVE_truncdipdi2
1070 if (HAVE_truncdipdi2)
1072 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdipdi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1075 #endif /* HAVE_truncdipdi2 */
1079 if (from_mode == PDImode)
1081 if (to_mode != DImode)
1083 from = convert_to_mode (DImode, from, unsignedp);
1088 #ifdef HAVE_extendpdidi2
1089 if (HAVE_extendpdidi2)
1091 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendpdidi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1094 #endif /* HAVE_extendpdidi2 */
1099 /* Now follow all the conversions between integers
1100 no more than a word long. */
1102 /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode. */
1103 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode)
1104 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode),
1105 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode)))
1107 if (!((GET_CODE (from) == MEM
1108 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from)
1109 && direct_load[(int) to_mode]
1110 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from, 0)))
1111 || GET_CODE (from) == REG
1112 || GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG))
1113 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
1114 if (GET_CODE (from) == REG && REGNO (from) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1115 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (from), to_mode))
1116 from = copy_to_reg (from);
1117 emit_move_insn (to, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from));
1121 /* Handle extension. */
1122 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
1124 /* Convert directly if that works. */
1125 if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp))
1126 != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1129 from = force_not_mem (from);
1131 emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code);
1136 enum machine_mode intermediate;
1140 /* Search for a mode to convert via. */
1141 for (intermediate = from_mode; intermediate != VOIDmode;
1142 intermediate = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (intermediate))
1143 if (((can_extend_p (to_mode, intermediate, unsignedp)
1144 != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1145 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (intermediate)
1146 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode),
1147 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (intermediate))))
1148 && (can_extend_p (intermediate, from_mode, unsignedp)
1149 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
1151 convert_move (to, convert_to_mode (intermediate, from,
1152 unsignedp), unsignedp);
1156 /* No suitable intermediate mode.
1157 Generate what we need with shifts. */
1158 shift_amount = build_int_2 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode)
1159 - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode), 0);
1160 from = gen_lowpart (to_mode, force_reg (from_mode, from));
1161 tmp = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, to_mode, from, shift_amount,
1163 tmp = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, to_mode, tmp, shift_amount,
1166 emit_move_insn (to, tmp);
1171 /* Support special truncate insns for certain modes. */
1173 if (from_mode == DImode && to_mode == SImode)
1175 #ifdef HAVE_truncdisi2
1176 if (HAVE_truncdisi2)
1178 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdisi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1182 convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
1186 if (from_mode == DImode && to_mode == HImode)
1188 #ifdef HAVE_truncdihi2
1189 if (HAVE_truncdihi2)
1191 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdihi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1195 convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
1199 if (from_mode == DImode && to_mode == QImode)
1201 #ifdef HAVE_truncdiqi2
1202 if (HAVE_truncdiqi2)
1204 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdiqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1208 convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
1212 if (from_mode == SImode && to_mode == HImode)
1214 #ifdef HAVE_truncsihi2
1215 if (HAVE_truncsihi2)
1217 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsihi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1221 convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
1225 if (from_mode == SImode && to_mode == QImode)
1227 #ifdef HAVE_truncsiqi2
1228 if (HAVE_truncsiqi2)
1230 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsiqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1234 convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
1238 if (from_mode == HImode && to_mode == QImode)
1240 #ifdef HAVE_trunchiqi2
1241 if (HAVE_trunchiqi2)
1243 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunchiqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1247 convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
1251 if (from_mode == TImode && to_mode == DImode)
1253 #ifdef HAVE_trunctidi2
1254 if (HAVE_trunctidi2)
1256 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctidi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1260 convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
1264 if (from_mode == TImode && to_mode == SImode)
1266 #ifdef HAVE_trunctisi2
1267 if (HAVE_trunctisi2)
1269 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctisi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1273 convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
1277 if (from_mode == TImode && to_mode == HImode)
1279 #ifdef HAVE_trunctihi2
1280 if (HAVE_trunctihi2)
1282 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctihi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1286 convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
1290 if (from_mode == TImode && to_mode == QImode)
1292 #ifdef HAVE_trunctiqi2
1293 if (HAVE_trunctiqi2)
1295 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctiqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
1299 convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
1303 /* Handle truncation of volatile memrefs, and so on;
1304 the things that couldn't be truncated directly,
1305 and for which there was no special instruction. */
1306 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
1308 rtx temp = force_reg (to_mode, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from));
1309 emit_move_insn (to, temp);
1313 /* Mode combination is not recognized. */
1317 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
1318 from converting X to mode MODE.
1319 Both X and MODE may be floating, or both integer.
1320 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
1321 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
1322 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion.
1324 This function *must not* call protect_from_queue
1325 except when putting X into an insn (in which case convert_move does it). */
1328 convert_to_mode (mode, x, unsignedp)
1329 enum machine_mode mode;
1333 return convert_modes (mode, VOIDmode, x, unsignedp);
1336 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
1337 from converting X from mode OLDMODE to mode MODE.
1338 Both modes may be floating, or both integer.
1339 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
1341 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
1342 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion.
1344 You can give VOIDmode for OLDMODE, if you are sure X has a nonvoid mode.
1346 This function *must not* call protect_from_queue
1347 except when putting X into an insn (in which case convert_move does it). */
1350 convert_modes (mode, oldmode, x, unsignedp)
1351 enum machine_mode mode, oldmode;
1357 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
1358 the required extension, strip it. */
1360 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x)
1361 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) >= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)
1362 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x) == unsignedp)
1363 x = gen_lowpart (mode, x);
1365 if (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode)
1366 oldmode = GET_MODE (x);
1368 if (mode == oldmode)
1371 /* There is one case that we must handle specially: If we are converting
1372 a CONST_INT into a mode whose size is twice HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and
1373 we are to interpret the constant as unsigned, gen_lowpart will do
1374 the wrong if the constant appears negative. What we want to do is
1375 make the high-order word of the constant zero, not all ones. */
1377 if (unsignedp && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
1378 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) == 2 * HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
1379 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT && INTVAL (x) < 0)
1381 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (x);
1383 if (oldmode != VOIDmode
1384 && HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode))
1386 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode);
1388 /* We need to zero extend VAL. */
1389 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
1392 return immed_double_const (val, (HOST_WIDE_INT) 0, mode);
1395 /* We can do this with a gen_lowpart if both desired and current modes
1396 are integer, and this is either a constant integer, a register, or a
1397 non-volatile MEM. Except for the constant case where MODE is no
1398 wider than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, we must be narrowing the operand. */
1400 if ((GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT
1401 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
1402 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
1403 && GET_MODE_CLASS (oldmode) == MODE_INT
1404 && (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE
1405 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (oldmode)
1406 && ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (x)
1407 && direct_load[(int) mode])
1408 || (GET_CODE (x) == REG
1409 && (! HARD_REGISTER_P (x)
1410 || HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (x), mode))
1411 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode),
1412 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x)))))))))
1414 /* ?? If we don't know OLDMODE, we have to assume here that
1415 X does not need sign- or zero-extension. This may not be
1416 the case, but it's the best we can do. */
1417 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT && oldmode != VOIDmode
1418 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (oldmode))
1420 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (x);
1421 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode);
1423 /* We must sign or zero-extend in this case. Start by
1424 zero-extending, then sign extend if we need to. */
1425 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
1427 && (val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1))))
1428 val |= (HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width;
1430 return gen_int_mode (val, mode);
1433 return gen_lowpart (mode, x);
1436 temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
1437 convert_move (temp, x, unsignedp);
1441 /* This macro is used to determine what the largest unit size that
1442 move_by_pieces can use is. */
1444 /* MOVE_MAX_PIECES is the number of bytes at a time which we can
1445 move efficiently, as opposed to MOVE_MAX which is the maximum
1446 number of bytes we can move with a single instruction. */
1448 #ifndef MOVE_MAX_PIECES
1449 #define MOVE_MAX_PIECES MOVE_MAX
1452 /* STORE_MAX_PIECES is the number of bytes at a time that we can
1453 store efficiently. Due to internal GCC limitations, this is
1454 MOVE_MAX_PIECES limited by the number of bytes GCC can represent
1455 for an immediate constant. */
1457 #define STORE_MAX_PIECES MIN (MOVE_MAX_PIECES, 2 * sizeof (HOST_WIDE_INT))
1459 /* Generate several move instructions to copy LEN bytes from block FROM to
1460 block TO. (These are MEM rtx's with BLKmode). The caller must pass FROM
1461 and TO through protect_from_queue before calling.
1463 If PUSH_ROUNDING is defined and TO is NULL, emit_single_push_insn is
1464 used to push FROM to the stack.
1466 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
1469 move_by_pieces (to, from, len, align)
1471 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
1474 struct move_by_pieces data;
1475 rtx to_addr, from_addr = XEXP (from, 0);
1476 unsigned int max_size = MOVE_MAX_PIECES + 1;
1477 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode;
1478 enum insn_code icode;
1481 data.from_addr = from_addr;
1484 to_addr = XEXP (to, 0);
1487 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC
1488 || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
1490 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
1497 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
1503 data.to_addr = to_addr;
1506 = (GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_DEC
1507 || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_INC
1508 || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_DEC);
1510 data.explicit_inc_from = 0;
1511 data.explicit_inc_to = 0;
1512 if (data.reverse) data.offset = len;
1515 /* If copying requires more than two move insns,
1516 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
1517 and use post-increment if available. */
1518 if (!(data.autinc_from && data.autinc_to)
1519 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (len, align) > 2)
1521 /* Find the mode of the largest move... */
1522 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
1523 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
1524 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
1527 if (USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data.reverse && ! data.autinc_from)
1529 data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (from_addr, len));
1530 data.autinc_from = 1;
1531 data.explicit_inc_from = -1;
1533 if (USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data.autinc_from)
1535 data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr);
1536 data.autinc_from = 1;
1537 data.explicit_inc_from = 1;
1539 if (!data.autinc_from && CONSTANT_P (from_addr))
1540 data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr);
1541 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to)
1543 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr, len));
1545 data.explicit_inc_to = -1;
1547 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to)
1549 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
1551 data.explicit_inc_to = 1;
1553 if (!data.autinc_to && CONSTANT_P (to_addr))
1554 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
1557 if (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode, align)
1558 || align > MOVE_MAX * BITS_PER_UNIT || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT)
1559 align = MOVE_MAX * BITS_PER_UNIT;
1561 /* First move what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
1562 successively smaller modes. */
1564 while (max_size > 1)
1566 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
1567 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
1568 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
1571 if (mode == VOIDmode)
1574 icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
1575 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
1576 move_by_pieces_1 (GEN_FCN (icode), mode, &data);
1578 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1581 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
1586 /* Return number of insns required to move L bytes by pieces.
1587 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume. */
1589 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
1590 move_by_pieces_ninsns (l, align)
1591 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l;
1594 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n_insns = 0;
1595 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT max_size = MOVE_MAX + 1;
1597 if (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode, align)
1598 || align > MOVE_MAX * BITS_PER_UNIT || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT)
1599 align = MOVE_MAX * BITS_PER_UNIT;
1601 while (max_size > 1)
1603 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode;
1604 enum insn_code icode;
1606 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
1607 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
1608 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
1611 if (mode == VOIDmode)
1614 icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
1615 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
1616 n_insns += l / GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), l %= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1618 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1626 /* Subroutine of move_by_pieces. Move as many bytes as appropriate
1627 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
1628 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
1631 move_by_pieces_1 (genfun, mode, data)
1632 rtx (*genfun) PARAMS ((rtx, ...));
1633 enum machine_mode mode;
1634 struct move_by_pieces *data;
1636 unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1637 rtx to1 = NULL_RTX, from1;
1639 while (data->len >= size)
1642 data->offset -= size;
1646 if (data->autinc_to)
1647 to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->to, mode, data->to_addr,
1650 to1 = adjust_address (data->to, mode, data->offset);
1653 if (data->autinc_from)
1654 from1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->from, mode, data->from_addr,
1657 from1 = adjust_address (data->from, mode, data->offset);
1659 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to < 0)
1660 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr,
1661 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)size)));
1662 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_from < 0)
1663 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->from_addr,
1664 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)size)));
1667 emit_insn ((*genfun) (to1, from1));
1670 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
1671 emit_single_push_insn (mode, from1, NULL);
1677 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to > 0)
1678 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr, GEN_INT (size)));
1679 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_from > 0)
1680 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->from_addr, GEN_INT (size)));
1682 if (! data->reverse)
1683 data->offset += size;
1689 /* Emit code to move a block Y to a block X. This may be done with
1690 string-move instructions, with multiple scalar move instructions,
1691 or with a library call.
1693 Both X and Y must be MEM rtx's (perhaps inside VOLATILE) with mode BLKmode.
1694 SIZE is an rtx that says how long they are.
1695 ALIGN is the maximum alignment we can assume they have.
1696 METHOD describes what kind of copy this is, and what mechanisms may be used.
1698 Return the address of the new block, if memcpy is called and returns it,
1702 emit_block_move (x, y, size, method)
1704 enum block_op_methods method;
1712 case BLOCK_OP_NORMAL:
1713 may_use_call = true;
1716 case BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM:
1717 may_use_call = block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm ();
1719 /* Make inhibit_defer_pop nonzero around the library call
1720 to force it to pop the arguments right away. */
1724 case BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL:
1725 may_use_call = false;
1732 align = MIN (MEM_ALIGN (x), MEM_ALIGN (y));
1734 if (GET_MODE (x) != BLKmode)
1736 if (GET_MODE (y) != BLKmode)
1739 x = protect_from_queue (x, 1);
1740 y = protect_from_queue (y, 0);
1741 size = protect_from_queue (size, 0);
1743 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
1745 if (GET_CODE (y) != MEM)
1750 /* Set MEM_SIZE as appropriate for this block copy. The main place this
1751 can be incorrect is coming from __builtin_memcpy. */
1752 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
1754 x = shallow_copy_rtx (x);
1755 y = shallow_copy_rtx (y);
1756 set_mem_size (x, size);
1757 set_mem_size (y, size);
1760 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT && MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size), align))
1761 move_by_pieces (x, y, INTVAL (size), align);
1762 else if (emit_block_move_via_movstr (x, y, size, align))
1764 else if (may_use_call)
1765 retval = emit_block_move_via_libcall (x, y, size);
1767 emit_block_move_via_loop (x, y, size, align);
1769 if (method == BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM)
1775 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Returns true if calling the
1776 block move libcall will not clobber any parameters which may have
1777 already been placed on the stack. */
1780 block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm ()
1786 /* Check to see whether memcpy takes all register arguments. */
1788 takes_regs_uninit, takes_regs_no, takes_regs_yes
1789 } takes_regs = takes_regs_uninit;
1793 case takes_regs_uninit:
1795 CUMULATIVE_ARGS args_so_far;
1798 fn = emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false);
1799 INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (args_so_far, TREE_TYPE (fn), NULL_RTX, 0);
1801 arg = TYPE_ARG_TYPES (TREE_TYPE (fn));
1802 for ( ; arg != void_list_node ; arg = TREE_CHAIN (arg))
1804 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_VALUE (arg));
1805 rtx tmp = FUNCTION_ARG (args_so_far, mode, NULL_TREE, 1);
1806 if (!tmp || !REG_P (tmp))
1807 goto fail_takes_regs;
1808 #ifdef FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
1809 if (FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (args_so_far, mode,
1811 goto fail_takes_regs;
1813 FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (args_so_far, mode, NULL_TREE, 1);
1816 takes_regs = takes_regs_yes;
1819 case takes_regs_yes:
1823 takes_regs = takes_regs_no;
1834 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a movstr pattern;
1835 return true if successful. */
1838 emit_block_move_via_movstr (x, y, size, align)
1842 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
1843 including more than one in the machine description unless
1844 the more limited one has some advantage. */
1846 rtx opalign = GEN_INT (align / BITS_PER_UNIT);
1847 enum machine_mode mode;
1849 /* Since this is a move insn, we don't care about volatility. */
1852 for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); mode != VOIDmode;
1853 mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode))
1855 enum insn_code code = movstr_optab[(int) mode];
1856 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred;
1858 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing
1859 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT
1860 here because if SIZE is less than the mode mask, as it is
1861 returned by the macro, it will definitely be less than the
1862 actual mode mask. */
1863 && ((GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
1864 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) INTVAL (size)
1865 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1)))
1866 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) >= BITS_PER_WORD)
1867 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[0].predicate) == 0
1868 || (*pred) (x, BLKmode))
1869 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[1].predicate) == 0
1870 || (*pred) (y, BLKmode))
1871 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[3].predicate) == 0
1872 || (*pred) (opalign, VOIDmode)))
1875 rtx last = get_last_insn ();
1878 op2 = convert_to_mode (mode, size, 1);
1879 pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[2].predicate;
1880 if (pred != 0 && ! (*pred) (op2, mode))
1881 op2 = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op2);
1883 /* ??? When called via emit_block_move_for_call, it'd be
1884 nice if there were some way to inform the backend, so
1885 that it doesn't fail the expansion because it thinks
1886 emitting the libcall would be more efficient. */
1888 pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (x, y, op2, opalign);
1896 delete_insns_since (last);
1904 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a call to memcpy or bcopy.
1905 Return the return value from memcpy, 0 otherwise. */
1908 emit_block_move_via_libcall (dst, src, size)
1911 tree call_expr, arg_list, fn, src_tree, dst_tree, size_tree;
1912 enum machine_mode size_mode;
1915 /* DST, SRC, or SIZE may have been passed through protect_from_queue.
1917 It is unsafe to save the value generated by protect_from_queue
1918 and reuse it later. Consider what happens if emit_queue is
1919 called before the return value from protect_from_queue is used.
1921 Expansion of the CALL_EXPR below will call emit_queue before
1922 we are finished emitting RTL for argument setup. So if we are
1923 not careful we could get the wrong value for an argument.
1925 To avoid this problem we go ahead and emit code to copy X, Y &
1926 SIZE into new pseudos. We can then place those new pseudos
1927 into an RTL_EXPR and use them later, even after a call to
1930 Note this is not strictly needed for library calls since they
1931 do not call emit_queue before loading their arguments. However,
1932 we may need to have library calls call emit_queue in the future
1933 since failing to do so could cause problems for targets which
1934 define SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES and pass arguments in registers. */
1936 dst = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (dst, 0));
1937 src = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (src, 0));
1939 if (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS)
1940 size_mode = TYPE_MODE (sizetype);
1942 size_mode = TYPE_MODE (unsigned_type_node);
1943 size = convert_to_mode (size_mode, size, 1);
1944 size = copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode, size);
1946 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
1947 memcpy in this context. This could be a user call to memcpy and
1948 the user may wish to examine the return value from memcpy. For
1949 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
1950 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code.
1952 For convenience, we generate the call to bcopy this way as well. */
1954 dst_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, dst);
1955 src_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, src);
1956 if (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS)
1957 size_tree = make_tree (sizetype, size);
1959 size_tree = make_tree (unsigned_type_node, size);
1961 fn = emit_block_move_libcall_fn (true);
1962 arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, size_tree, NULL_TREE);
1963 if (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS)
1965 arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, src_tree, arg_list);
1966 arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, dst_tree, arg_list);
1970 arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, dst_tree, arg_list);
1971 arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, src_tree, arg_list);
1974 /* Now we have to build up the CALL_EXPR itself. */
1975 call_expr = build1 (ADDR_EXPR, build_pointer_type (TREE_TYPE (fn)), fn);
1976 call_expr = build (CALL_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (fn)),
1977 call_expr, arg_list, NULL_TREE);
1978 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (call_expr) = 1;
1980 retval = expand_expr (call_expr, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
1982 /* If we are initializing a readonly value, show the above call
1983 clobbered it. Otherwise, a load from it may erroneously be
1984 hoisted from a loop. */
1985 if (RTX_UNCHANGING_P (dst))
1986 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, dst));
1988 return (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS ? retval : NULL_RTX);
1991 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move_via_libcall. Create the tree node
1992 for the function we use for block copies. The first time FOR_CALL
1993 is true, we call assemble_external. */
1995 static GTY(()) tree block_move_fn;
1998 emit_block_move_libcall_fn (for_call)
2001 static bool emitted_extern;
2002 tree fn = block_move_fn, args;
2006 if (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS)
2008 fn = get_identifier ("memcpy");
2009 args = build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node, ptr_type_node,
2010 const_ptr_type_node, sizetype,
2015 fn = get_identifier ("bcopy");
2016 args = build_function_type_list (void_type_node, const_ptr_type_node,
2017 ptr_type_node, unsigned_type_node,
2021 fn = build_decl (FUNCTION_DECL, fn, args);
2022 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn) = 1;
2023 TREE_PUBLIC (fn) = 1;
2024 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn) = 1;
2025 TREE_NOTHROW (fn) = 1;
2030 if (for_call && !emitted_extern)
2032 emitted_extern = true;
2033 make_decl_rtl (fn, NULL);
2034 assemble_external (fn);
2040 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Copy the data via an explicit
2041 loop. This is used only when libcalls are forbidden. */
2042 /* ??? It'd be nice to copy in hunks larger than QImode. */
2045 emit_block_move_via_loop (x, y, size, align)
2047 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
2049 rtx cmp_label, top_label, iter, x_addr, y_addr, tmp;
2050 enum machine_mode iter_mode;
2052 iter_mode = GET_MODE (size);
2053 if (iter_mode == VOIDmode)
2054 iter_mode = word_mode;
2056 top_label = gen_label_rtx ();
2057 cmp_label = gen_label_rtx ();
2058 iter = gen_reg_rtx (iter_mode);
2060 emit_move_insn (iter, const0_rtx);
2062 x_addr = force_operand (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
2063 y_addr = force_operand (XEXP (y, 0), NULL_RTX);
2064 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
2066 emit_note (NULL, NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG);
2068 emit_jump (cmp_label);
2069 emit_label (top_label);
2071 tmp = convert_modes (Pmode, iter_mode, iter, true);
2072 x_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, x_addr, tmp);
2073 y_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, y_addr, tmp);
2074 x = change_address (x, QImode, x_addr);
2075 y = change_address (y, QImode, y_addr);
2077 emit_move_insn (x, y);
2079 tmp = expand_simple_binop (iter_mode, PLUS, iter, const1_rtx, iter,
2080 true, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
2082 emit_move_insn (iter, tmp);
2084 emit_note (NULL, NOTE_INSN_LOOP_CONT);
2085 emit_label (cmp_label);
2087 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (iter, size, LT, NULL_RTX, iter_mode,
2090 emit_note (NULL, NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END);
2093 /* Copy all or part of a value X into registers starting at REGNO.
2094 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
2097 move_block_to_reg (regno, x, nregs, mode)
2101 enum machine_mode mode;
2104 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
2112 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x))
2113 x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x));
2115 /* See if the machine can do this with a load multiple insn. */
2116 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
2117 if (HAVE_load_multiple)
2119 last = get_last_insn ();
2120 pat = gen_load_multiple (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno), x,
2128 delete_insns_since (last);
2132 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
2133 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno + i),
2134 operand_subword_force (x, i, mode));
2137 /* Copy all or part of a BLKmode value X out of registers starting at REGNO.
2138 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. SIZE indicates the number
2139 of bytes in the object X. */
2142 move_block_from_reg (regno, x, nregs, size)
2149 #ifdef HAVE_store_multiple
2153 enum machine_mode mode;
2158 /* If SIZE is that of a mode no bigger than a word, just use that
2159 mode's store operation. */
2160 if (size <= UNITS_PER_WORD
2161 && (mode = mode_for_size (size * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 0)) != BLKmode)
2163 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (x, mode, 0), gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno));
2167 /* Blocks smaller than a word on a BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN machine must be aligned
2168 to the left before storing to memory. Note that the previous test
2169 doesn't handle all cases (e.g. SIZE == 3). */
2170 if (size < UNITS_PER_WORD && BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
2172 rtx tem = operand_subword (x, 0, 1, BLKmode);
2178 shift = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, word_mode,
2179 gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno),
2180 build_int_2 ((UNITS_PER_WORD - size)
2181 * BITS_PER_UNIT, 0), NULL_RTX, 0);
2182 emit_move_insn (tem, shift);
2186 /* See if the machine can do this with a store multiple insn. */
2187 #ifdef HAVE_store_multiple
2188 if (HAVE_store_multiple)
2190 last = get_last_insn ();
2191 pat = gen_store_multiple (x, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno),
2199 delete_insns_since (last);
2203 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
2205 rtx tem = operand_subword (x, i, 1, BLKmode);
2210 emit_move_insn (tem, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno + i));
2214 /* Generate a PARALLEL rtx for a new non-consecutive group of registers from
2215 ORIG, where ORIG is a non-consecutive group of registers represented by
2216 a PARALLEL. The clone is identical to the original except in that the
2217 original set of registers is replaced by a new set of pseudo registers.
2218 The new set has the same modes as the original set. */
2221 gen_group_rtx (orig)
2227 if (GET_CODE (orig) != PARALLEL)
2230 length = XVECLEN (orig, 0);
2231 tmps = (rtx *) alloca (sizeof (rtx) * length);
2233 /* Skip a NULL entry in first slot. */
2234 i = XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1;
2239 for (; i < length; i++)
2241 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, i), 0));
2242 rtx offset = XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, i), 1);
2244 tmps[i] = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_reg_rtx (mode), offset);
2247 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (orig), gen_rtvec_v (length, tmps));
2250 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to a block DST, where DST is non-consecutive
2251 registers represented by a PARALLEL. SSIZE represents the total size of
2252 block SRC in bytes, or -1 if not known. */
2253 /* ??? If SSIZE % UNITS_PER_WORD != 0, we make the blatant assumption that
2254 the balance will be in what would be the low-order memory addresses, i.e.
2255 left justified for big endian, right justified for little endian. This
2256 happens to be true for the targets currently using this support. If this
2257 ever changes, a new target macro along the lines of FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
2261 emit_group_load (dst, orig_src, ssize)
2268 if (GET_CODE (dst) != PARALLEL)
2271 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
2272 both on the stack and in registers. */
2273 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, 0), 0))
2278 tmps = (rtx *) alloca (sizeof (rtx) * XVECLEN (dst, 0));
2280 /* Process the pieces. */
2281 for (i = start; i < XVECLEN (dst, 0); i++)
2283 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0));
2284 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos = INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 1));
2285 unsigned int bytelen = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2288 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
2289 if (ssize >= 0 && bytepos + (HOST_WIDE_INT) bytelen > ssize)
2291 shift = (bytelen - (ssize - bytepos)) * BITS_PER_UNIT;
2292 bytelen = ssize - bytepos;
2297 /* If we won't be loading directly from memory, protect the real source
2298 from strange tricks we might play; but make sure that the source can
2299 be loaded directly into the destination. */
2301 if (GET_CODE (orig_src) != MEM
2302 && (!CONSTANT_P (orig_src)
2303 || (GET_MODE (orig_src) != mode
2304 && GET_MODE (orig_src) != VOIDmode)))
2306 if (GET_MODE (orig_src) == VOIDmode)
2307 src = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2309 src = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (orig_src));
2311 emit_move_insn (src, orig_src);
2314 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
2315 if (GET_CODE (src) == MEM
2316 && MEM_ALIGN (src) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)
2317 && bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 0
2318 && bytelen == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
2320 tmps[i] = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2321 emit_move_insn (tmps[i], adjust_address (src, mode, bytepos));
2323 else if (GET_CODE (src) == CONCAT)
2325 unsigned int slen = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src));
2326 unsigned int slen0 = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src, 0)));
2328 if ((bytepos == 0 && bytelen == slen0)
2329 || (bytepos != 0 && bytepos + bytelen <= slen))
2331 /* The following assumes that the concatenated objects all
2332 have the same size. In this case, a simple calculation
2333 can be used to determine the object and the bit field
2335 tmps[i] = XEXP (src, bytepos / slen0);
2336 if (! CONSTANT_P (tmps[i])
2337 && (GET_CODE (tmps[i]) != REG || GET_MODE (tmps[i]) != mode))
2338 tmps[i] = extract_bit_field (tmps[i], bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT,
2339 (bytepos % slen0) * BITS_PER_UNIT,
2340 1, NULL_RTX, mode, mode, ssize);
2342 else if (bytepos == 0)
2344 rtx mem = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src), slen, 0);
2345 emit_move_insn (mem, src);
2346 tmps[i] = adjust_address (mem, mode, 0);
2351 else if (CONSTANT_P (src)
2352 || (GET_CODE (src) == REG && GET_MODE (src) == mode))
2355 tmps[i] = extract_bit_field (src, bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT,
2356 bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT, 1, NULL_RTX,
2359 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && shift)
2360 expand_binop (mode, ashl_optab, tmps[i], GEN_INT (shift),
2361 tmps[i], 0, OPTAB_WIDEN);
2366 /* Copy the extracted pieces into the proper (probable) hard regs. */
2367 for (i = start; i < XVECLEN (dst, 0); i++)
2368 emit_move_insn (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0), tmps[i]);
2371 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to block DST, where SRC and DST are
2372 non-consecutive groups of registers, each represented by a PARALLEL. */
2375 emit_group_move (dst, src)
2380 if (GET_CODE (src) != PARALLEL
2381 || GET_CODE (dst) != PARALLEL
2382 || XVECLEN (src, 0) != XVECLEN (dst, 0))
2385 /* Skip first entry if NULL. */
2386 for (i = XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1; i < XVECLEN (src, 0); i++)
2387 emit_move_insn (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0),
2388 XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 0));
2391 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to a block DST, where SRC is non-consecutive
2392 registers represented by a PARALLEL. SSIZE represents the total size of
2393 block DST, or -1 if not known. */
2396 emit_group_store (orig_dst, src, ssize)
2403 if (GET_CODE (src) != PARALLEL)
2406 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
2407 both on the stack and in registers. */
2408 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, 0), 0))
2413 tmps = (rtx *) alloca (sizeof (rtx) * XVECLEN (src, 0));
2415 /* Copy the (probable) hard regs into pseudos. */
2416 for (i = start; i < XVECLEN (src, 0); i++)
2418 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 0);
2419 tmps[i] = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (reg));
2420 emit_move_insn (tmps[i], reg);
2424 /* If we won't be storing directly into memory, protect the real destination
2425 from strange tricks we might play. */
2427 if (GET_CODE (dst) == PARALLEL)
2431 /* We can get a PARALLEL dst if there is a conditional expression in
2432 a return statement. In that case, the dst and src are the same,
2433 so no action is necessary. */
2434 if (rtx_equal_p (dst, src))
2437 /* It is unclear if we can ever reach here, but we may as well handle
2438 it. Allocate a temporary, and split this into a store/load to/from
2441 temp = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dst), ssize, 0);
2442 emit_group_store (temp, src, ssize);
2443 emit_group_load (dst, temp, ssize);
2446 else if (GET_CODE (dst) != MEM && GET_CODE (dst) != CONCAT)
2448 dst = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (orig_dst));
2449 /* Make life a bit easier for combine. */
2450 emit_move_insn (dst, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (orig_dst)));
2453 /* Process the pieces. */
2454 for (i = start; i < XVECLEN (src, 0); i++)
2456 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos = INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 1));
2457 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (tmps[i]);
2458 unsigned int bytelen = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2461 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
2462 if (ssize >= 0 && bytepos + (HOST_WIDE_INT) bytelen > ssize)
2464 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
2466 int shift = (bytelen - (ssize - bytepos)) * BITS_PER_UNIT;
2467 expand_binop (mode, ashr_optab, tmps[i], GEN_INT (shift),
2468 tmps[i], 0, OPTAB_WIDEN);
2470 bytelen = ssize - bytepos;
2473 if (GET_CODE (dst) == CONCAT)
2475 if (bytepos + bytelen <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0))))
2476 dest = XEXP (dst, 0);
2477 else if (bytepos >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0))))
2479 bytepos -= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0)));
2480 dest = XEXP (dst, 1);
2482 else if (bytepos == 0 && XVECLEN (src, 0))
2484 dest = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dest),
2485 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)), 0);
2486 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest, GET_MODE (tmps[i]), bytepos),
2495 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
2496 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
2497 && MEM_ALIGN (dest) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)
2498 && bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 0
2499 && bytelen == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
2500 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest, mode, bytepos), tmps[i]);
2502 store_bit_field (dest, bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT, bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT,
2503 mode, tmps[i], ssize);
2508 /* Copy from the pseudo into the (probable) hard reg. */
2509 if (orig_dst != dst)
2510 emit_move_insn (orig_dst, dst);
2513 /* Generate code to copy a BLKmode object of TYPE out of a
2514 set of registers starting with SRCREG into TGTBLK. If TGTBLK
2515 is null, a stack temporary is created. TGTBLK is returned.
2517 The primary purpose of this routine is to handle functions
2518 that return BLKmode structures in registers. Some machines
2519 (the PA for example) want to return all small structures
2520 in registers regardless of the structure's alignment. */
2523 copy_blkmode_from_reg (tgtblk, srcreg, type)
2528 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bytes = int_size_in_bytes (type);
2529 rtx src = NULL, dst = NULL;
2530 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize = MIN (TYPE_ALIGN (type), BITS_PER_WORD);
2531 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos, xbitpos, big_endian_correction = 0;
2535 tgtblk = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type,
2537 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST)),
2539 preserve_temp_slots (tgtblk);
2542 /* This code assumes srcreg is at least a full word. If it isn't, copy it
2543 into a new pseudo which is a full word. */
2545 if (GET_MODE (srcreg) != BLKmode
2546 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (srcreg)) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
2547 srcreg = convert_to_mode (word_mode, srcreg, TREE_UNSIGNED (type));
2549 /* Structures whose size is not a multiple of a word are aligned
2550 to the least significant byte (to the right). On a BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
2551 machine, this means we must skip the empty high order bytes when
2552 calculating the bit offset. */
2553 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
2554 && bytes % UNITS_PER_WORD)
2555 big_endian_correction
2556 = (BITS_PER_WORD - ((bytes % UNITS_PER_WORD) * BITS_PER_UNIT));
2558 /* Copy the structure BITSIZE bites at a time.
2560 We could probably emit more efficient code for machines which do not use
2561 strict alignment, but it doesn't seem worth the effort at the current
2563 for (bitpos = 0, xbitpos = big_endian_correction;
2564 bitpos < bytes * BITS_PER_UNIT;
2565 bitpos += bitsize, xbitpos += bitsize)
2567 /* We need a new source operand each time xbitpos is on a
2568 word boundary and when xbitpos == big_endian_correction
2569 (the first time through). */
2570 if (xbitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0
2571 || xbitpos == big_endian_correction)
2572 src = operand_subword_force (srcreg, xbitpos / BITS_PER_WORD,
2575 /* We need a new destination operand each time bitpos is on
2577 if (bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0)
2578 dst = operand_subword (tgtblk, bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD, 1, BLKmode);
2580 /* Use xbitpos for the source extraction (right justified) and
2581 xbitpos for the destination store (left justified). */
2582 store_bit_field (dst, bitsize, bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD, word_mode,
2583 extract_bit_field (src, bitsize,
2584 xbitpos % BITS_PER_WORD, 1,
2585 NULL_RTX, word_mode, word_mode,
2593 /* Add a USE expression for REG to the (possibly empty) list pointed
2594 to by CALL_FUSAGE. REG must denote a hard register. */
2597 use_reg (call_fusage, reg)
2598 rtx *call_fusage, reg;
2600 if (GET_CODE (reg) != REG
2601 || REGNO (reg) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2605 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
2606 gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, reg), *call_fusage);
2609 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each of NREGS consecutive regs,
2610 starting at REGNO. All of these registers must be hard registers. */
2613 use_regs (call_fusage, regno, nregs)
2620 if (regno + nregs > FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2623 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
2624 use_reg (call_fusage, regno_reg_rtx[regno + i]);
2627 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each REG contained in the
2628 PARALLEL REGS. This is for calls that pass values in multiple
2629 non-contiguous locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
2632 use_group_regs (call_fusage, regs)
2638 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (regs, 0); i++)
2640 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (regs, 0, i), 0);
2642 /* A NULL entry means the parameter goes both on the stack and in
2643 registers. This can also be a MEM for targets that pass values
2644 partially on the stack and partially in registers. */
2645 if (reg != 0 && GET_CODE (reg) == REG)
2646 use_reg (call_fusage, reg);
2651 /* Determine whether the LEN bytes generated by CONSTFUN can be
2652 stored to memory using several move instructions. CONSTFUNDATA is
2653 a pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2654 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. Return nonzero if a
2655 call to store_by_pieces should succeed. */
2658 can_store_by_pieces (len, constfun, constfundata, align)
2659 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
2660 rtx (*constfun) PARAMS ((PTR, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode));
2664 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT max_size, l;
2665 HOST_WIDE_INT offset = 0;
2666 enum machine_mode mode, tmode;
2667 enum insn_code icode;
2671 if (! STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len, align))
2674 if (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode, align)
2675 || align > MOVE_MAX * BITS_PER_UNIT || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT)
2676 align = MOVE_MAX * BITS_PER_UNIT;
2678 /* We would first store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2679 successively smaller modes. */
2682 reverse <= (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT || HAVE_POST_DECREMENT);
2687 max_size = STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1;
2688 while (max_size > 1)
2690 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
2691 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2692 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
2695 if (mode == VOIDmode)
2698 icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
2699 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
2700 && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
2702 unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2709 cst = (*constfun) (constfundata, offset, mode);
2710 if (!LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (cst))
2720 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2723 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2731 /* Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes generated by
2732 CONSTFUN to block TO. (A MEM rtx with BLKmode). CONSTFUNDATA is a
2733 pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2734 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2737 store_by_pieces (to, len, constfun, constfundata, align)
2739 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
2740 rtx (*constfun) PARAMS ((PTR, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode));
2744 struct store_by_pieces data;
2746 if (! STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len, align))
2748 to = protect_from_queue (to, 1);
2749 data.constfun = constfun;
2750 data.constfundata = constfundata;
2753 store_by_pieces_1 (&data, align);
2756 /* Generate several move instructions to clear LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2757 rtx with BLKmode). The caller must pass TO through protect_from_queue
2758 before calling. ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2761 clear_by_pieces (to, len, align)
2763 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
2766 struct store_by_pieces data;
2768 data.constfun = clear_by_pieces_1;
2769 data.constfundata = NULL;
2772 store_by_pieces_1 (&data, align);
2775 /* Callback routine for clear_by_pieces.
2776 Return const0_rtx unconditionally. */
2779 clear_by_pieces_1 (data, offset, mode)
2780 PTR data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
2781 HOST_WIDE_INT offset ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
2782 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
2787 /* Subroutine of clear_by_pieces and store_by_pieces.
2788 Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2789 rtx with BLKmode). The caller must pass TO through protect_from_queue
2790 before calling. ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2793 store_by_pieces_1 (data, align)
2794 struct store_by_pieces *data;
2797 rtx to_addr = XEXP (data->to, 0);
2798 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT max_size = STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1;
2799 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode;
2800 enum insn_code icode;
2803 data->to_addr = to_addr;
2805 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC
2806 || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
2808 data->explicit_inc_to = 0;
2810 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
2812 data->offset = data->len;
2814 /* If storing requires more than two move insns,
2815 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
2816 and use post-increment if available. */
2817 if (!data->autinc_to
2818 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (data->len, align) > 2)
2820 /* Determine the main mode we'll be using. */
2821 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
2822 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2823 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
2826 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data->reverse && ! data->autinc_to)
2828 data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr, data->len));
2829 data->autinc_to = 1;
2830 data->explicit_inc_to = -1;
2833 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data->reverse
2834 && ! data->autinc_to)
2836 data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
2837 data->autinc_to = 1;
2838 data->explicit_inc_to = 1;
2841 if ( !data->autinc_to && CONSTANT_P (to_addr))
2842 data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
2845 if (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode, align)
2846 || align > MOVE_MAX * BITS_PER_UNIT || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT)
2847 align = MOVE_MAX * BITS_PER_UNIT;
2849 /* First store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2850 successively smaller modes. */
2852 while (max_size > 1)
2854 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
2855 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2856 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
2859 if (mode == VOIDmode)
2862 icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
2863 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
2864 store_by_pieces_2 (GEN_FCN (icode), mode, data);
2866 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2869 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2874 /* Subroutine of store_by_pieces_1. Store as many bytes as appropriate
2875 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
2876 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
2879 store_by_pieces_2 (genfun, mode, data)
2880 rtx (*genfun) PARAMS ((rtx, ...));
2881 enum machine_mode mode;
2882 struct store_by_pieces *data;
2884 unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2887 while (data->len >= size)
2890 data->offset -= size;
2892 if (data->autinc_to)
2893 to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->to, mode, data->to_addr,
2896 to1 = adjust_address (data->to, mode, data->offset);
2898 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to < 0)
2899 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr,
2900 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT) size)));
2902 cst = (*data->constfun) (data->constfundata, data->offset, mode);
2903 emit_insn ((*genfun) (to1, cst));
2905 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to > 0)
2906 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr, GEN_INT (size)));
2908 if (! data->reverse)
2909 data->offset += size;
2915 /* Write zeros through the storage of OBJECT. If OBJECT has BLKmode, SIZE is
2916 its length in bytes. */
2919 clear_storage (object, size)
2924 unsigned int align = (GET_CODE (object) == MEM ? MEM_ALIGN (object)
2925 : GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (GET_MODE (object)));
2927 /* If OBJECT is not BLKmode and SIZE is the same size as its mode,
2928 just move a zero. Otherwise, do this a piece at a time. */
2929 if (GET_MODE (object) != BLKmode
2930 && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
2931 && INTVAL (size) == (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (object)))
2932 emit_move_insn (object, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (object)));
2935 object = protect_from_queue (object, 1);
2936 size = protect_from_queue (size, 0);
2938 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
2939 && CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size), align))
2940 clear_by_pieces (object, INTVAL (size), align);
2941 else if (clear_storage_via_clrstr (object, size, align))
2944 retval = clear_storage_via_libcall (object, size);
2950 /* A subroutine of clear_storage. Expand a clrstr pattern;
2951 return true if successful. */
2954 clear_storage_via_clrstr (object, size, align)
2958 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
2959 including more than one in the machine description unless
2960 the more limited one has some advantage. */
2962 rtx opalign = GEN_INT (align / BITS_PER_UNIT);
2963 enum machine_mode mode;
2965 for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); mode != VOIDmode;
2966 mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode))
2968 enum insn_code code = clrstr_optab[(int) mode];
2969 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred;
2971 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing
2972 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than
2973 BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT here because if SIZE is less than
2974 the mode mask, as it is returned by the macro, it will
2975 definitely be less than the actual mode mask. */
2976 && ((GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
2977 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) INTVAL (size)
2978 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1)))
2979 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) >= BITS_PER_WORD)
2980 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[0].predicate) == 0
2981 || (*pred) (object, BLKmode))
2982 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[2].predicate) == 0
2983 || (*pred) (opalign, VOIDmode)))
2986 rtx last = get_last_insn ();
2989 op1 = convert_to_mode (mode, size, 1);
2990 pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[1].predicate;
2991 if (pred != 0 && ! (*pred) (op1, mode))
2992 op1 = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op1);
2994 pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (object, op1, opalign);
3001 delete_insns_since (last);
3008 /* A subroutine of clear_storage. Expand a call to memset or bzero.
3009 Return the return value of memset, 0 otherwise. */
3012 clear_storage_via_libcall (object, size)
3015 tree call_expr, arg_list, fn, object_tree, size_tree;
3016 enum machine_mode size_mode;
3019 /* OBJECT or SIZE may have been passed through protect_from_queue.
3021 It is unsafe to save the value generated by protect_from_queue
3022 and reuse it later. Consider what happens if emit_queue is
3023 called before the return value from protect_from_queue is used.
3025 Expansion of the CALL_EXPR below will call emit_queue before
3026 we are finished emitting RTL for argument setup. So if we are
3027 not careful we could get the wrong value for an argument.
3029 To avoid this problem we go ahead and emit code to copy OBJECT
3030 and SIZE into new pseudos. We can then place those new pseudos
3031 into an RTL_EXPR and use them later, even after a call to
3034 Note this is not strictly needed for library calls since they
3035 do not call emit_queue before loading their arguments. However,
3036 we may need to have library calls call emit_queue in the future
3037 since failing to do so could cause problems for targets which
3038 define SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES and pass arguments in registers. */
3040 object = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (object, 0));
3042 if (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS)
3043 size_mode = TYPE_MODE (sizetype);
3045 size_mode = TYPE_MODE (unsigned_type_node);
3046 size = convert_to_mode (size_mode, size, 1);
3047 size = copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode, size);
3049 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
3050 memset in this context. This could be a user call to memset and
3051 the user may wish to examine the return value from memset. For
3052 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
3053 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code.
3055 For convenience, we generate the call to bzero this way as well. */
3057 object_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, object);
3058 if (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS)
3059 size_tree = make_tree (sizetype, size);
3061 size_tree = make_tree (unsigned_type_node, size);
3063 fn = clear_storage_libcall_fn (true);
3064 arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, size_tree, NULL_TREE);
3065 if (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS)
3066 arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, integer_zero_node, arg_list);
3067 arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, object_tree, arg_list);
3069 /* Now we have to build up the CALL_EXPR itself. */
3070 call_expr = build1 (ADDR_EXPR, build_pointer_type (TREE_TYPE (fn)), fn);
3071 call_expr = build (CALL_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (fn)),
3072 call_expr, arg_list, NULL_TREE);
3073 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (call_expr) = 1;
3075 retval = expand_expr (call_expr, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
3077 /* If we are initializing a readonly value, show the above call
3078 clobbered it. Otherwise, a load from it may erroneously be
3079 hoisted from a loop. */
3080 if (RTX_UNCHANGING_P (object))
3081 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, object));
3083 return (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS ? retval : NULL_RTX);
3086 /* A subroutine of clear_storage_via_libcall. Create the tree node
3087 for the function we use for block clears. The first time FOR_CALL
3088 is true, we call assemble_external. */
3090 static GTY(()) tree block_clear_fn;
3093 clear_storage_libcall_fn (for_call)
3096 static bool emitted_extern;
3097 tree fn = block_clear_fn, args;
3101 if (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS)
3103 fn = get_identifier ("memset");
3104 args = build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node, ptr_type_node,
3105 integer_type_node, sizetype,
3110 fn = get_identifier ("bzero");
3111 args = build_function_type_list (void_type_node, ptr_type_node,
3112 unsigned_type_node, NULL_TREE);
3115 fn = build_decl (FUNCTION_DECL, fn, args);
3116 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn) = 1;
3117 TREE_PUBLIC (fn) = 1;
3118 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn) = 1;
3119 TREE_NOTHROW (fn) = 1;
3121 block_clear_fn = fn;
3124 if (for_call && !emitted_extern)
3126 emitted_extern = true;
3127 make_decl_rtl (fn, NULL);
3128 assemble_external (fn);
3134 /* Generate code to copy Y into X.
3135 Both Y and X must have the same mode, except that
3136 Y can be a constant with VOIDmode.
3137 This mode cannot be BLKmode; use emit_block_move for that.
3139 Return the last instruction emitted. */
3142 emit_move_insn (x, y)
3145 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
3146 rtx y_cst = NULL_RTX;
3149 x = protect_from_queue (x, 1);
3150 y = protect_from_queue (y, 0);
3152 if (mode == BLKmode || (GET_MODE (y) != mode && GET_MODE (y) != VOIDmode))
3155 /* Never force constant_p_rtx to memory. */
3156 if (GET_CODE (y) == CONSTANT_P_RTX)
3158 else if (CONSTANT_P (y))
3161 && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
3162 && (last_insn = compress_float_constant (x, y)))
3165 if (!LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (y))
3168 y = force_const_mem (mode, y);
3170 /* If the target's cannot_force_const_mem prevented the spill,
3171 assume that the target's move expanders will also take care
3172 of the non-legitimate constant. */
3178 /* If X or Y are memory references, verify that their addresses are valid
3180 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
3181 && ((! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0))
3182 && ! push_operand (x, GET_MODE (x)))
3184 && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 0)))))
3185 x = validize_mem (x);
3187 if (GET_CODE (y) == MEM
3188 && (! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (y), XEXP (y, 0))
3190 && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (y, 0)))))
3191 y = validize_mem (y);
3193 if (mode == BLKmode)
3196 last_insn = emit_move_insn_1 (x, y);
3198 if (y_cst && GET_CODE (x) == REG)
3199 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn, REG_EQUAL, y_cst);
3204 /* Low level part of emit_move_insn.
3205 Called just like emit_move_insn, but assumes X and Y
3206 are basically valid. */
3209 emit_move_insn_1 (x, y)
3212 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
3213 enum machine_mode submode;
3214 enum mode_class class = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode);
3216 if ((unsigned int) mode >= (unsigned int) MAX_MACHINE_MODE)
3219 if (mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3221 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code) (x, y));
3223 /* Expand complex moves by moving real part and imag part, if possible. */
3224 else if ((class == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT || class == MODE_COMPLEX_INT)
3225 && BLKmode != (submode = GET_MODE_INNER (mode))
3226 && (mov_optab->handlers[(int) submode].insn_code
3227 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
3229 /* Don't split destination if it is a stack push. */
3230 int stack = push_operand (x, GET_MODE (x));
3232 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3233 /* In case we output to the stack, but the size is smaller machine can
3234 push exactly, we need to use move instructions. */
3236 && (PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (submode))
3237 != GET_MODE_SIZE (submode)))
3240 HOST_WIDE_INT offset1, offset2;
3242 /* Do not use anti_adjust_stack, since we don't want to update
3243 stack_pointer_delta. */
3244 temp = expand_binop (Pmode,
3245 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3253 (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)))),
3254 stack_pointer_rtx, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3256 if (temp != stack_pointer_rtx)
3257 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx, temp);
3259 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3261 offset2 = GET_MODE_SIZE (submode);
3263 offset1 = -PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)));
3264 offset2 = (-PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)))
3265 + GET_MODE_SIZE (submode));
3268 emit_move_insn (change_address (x, submode,
3269 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
3271 GEN_INT (offset1))),
3272 gen_realpart (submode, y));
3273 emit_move_insn (change_address (x, submode,
3274 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
3276 GEN_INT (offset2))),
3277 gen_imagpart (submode, y));
3281 /* If this is a stack, push the highpart first, so it
3282 will be in the argument order.
3284 In that case, change_address is used only to convert
3285 the mode, not to change the address. */
3288 /* Note that the real part always precedes the imag part in memory
3289 regardless of machine's endianness. */
3290 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3291 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab->handlers[(int) submode].insn_code)
3292 (gen_rtx_MEM (submode, XEXP (x, 0)),
3293 gen_imagpart (submode, y)));
3294 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab->handlers[(int) submode].insn_code)
3295 (gen_rtx_MEM (submode, XEXP (x, 0)),
3296 gen_realpart (submode, y)));
3298 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab->handlers[(int) submode].insn_code)
3299 (gen_rtx_MEM (submode, XEXP (x, 0)),
3300 gen_realpart (submode, y)));
3301 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab->handlers[(int) submode].insn_code)
3302 (gen_rtx_MEM (submode, XEXP (x, 0)),
3303 gen_imagpart (submode, y)));
3308 rtx realpart_x, realpart_y;
3309 rtx imagpart_x, imagpart_y;
3311 /* If this is a complex value with each part being smaller than a
3312 word, the usual calling sequence will likely pack the pieces into
3313 a single register. Unfortunately, SUBREG of hard registers only
3314 deals in terms of words, so we have a problem converting input
3315 arguments to the CONCAT of two registers that is used elsewhere
3316 for complex values. If this is before reload, we can copy it into
3317 memory and reload. FIXME, we should see about using extract and
3318 insert on integer registers, but complex short and complex char
3319 variables should be rarely used. */
3320 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) < 2 * BITS_PER_WORD
3321 && (reload_in_progress | reload_completed) == 0)
3324 = (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER);
3326 = (REG_P (y) && REGNO (y) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER);
3328 if (packed_dest_p || packed_src_p)
3330 enum mode_class reg_class = ((class == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
3331 ? MODE_FLOAT : MODE_INT);
3333 enum machine_mode reg_mode
3334 = mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), reg_class, 1);
3336 if (reg_mode != BLKmode)
3338 rtx mem = assign_stack_temp (reg_mode,
3339 GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), 0);
3340 rtx cmem = adjust_address (mem, mode, 0);
3343 = N_("function using short complex types cannot be inline");
3347 rtx sreg = gen_rtx_SUBREG (reg_mode, x, 0);
3349 emit_move_insn_1 (cmem, y);
3350 return emit_move_insn_1 (sreg, mem);
3354 rtx sreg = gen_rtx_SUBREG (reg_mode, y, 0);
3356 emit_move_insn_1 (mem, sreg);
3357 return emit_move_insn_1 (x, cmem);
3363 realpart_x = gen_realpart (submode, x);
3364 realpart_y = gen_realpart (submode, y);
3365 imagpart_x = gen_imagpart (submode, x);
3366 imagpart_y = gen_imagpart (submode, y);
3368 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3369 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3370 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values.
3371 We never want to emit such a clobber after reload. */
3373 && ! (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
3374 && (GET_CODE (realpart_x) == SUBREG
3375 || GET_CODE (imagpart_x) == SUBREG))
3376 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, x));
3378 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab->handlers[(int) submode].insn_code)
3379 (realpart_x, realpart_y));
3380 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab->handlers[(int) submode].insn_code)
3381 (imagpart_x, imagpart_y));
3384 return get_last_insn ();
3387 /* Handle MODE_CC modes: If we don't have a special move insn for this mode,
3388 find a mode to do it in. If we have a movcc, use it. Otherwise,
3389 find the MODE_INT mode of the same width. */
3390 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC
3391 && mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code == CODE_FOR_nothing)
3393 enum insn_code insn_code;
3394 enum machine_mode tmode = VOIDmode;
3398 && mov_optab->handlers[(int) CCmode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3401 for (tmode = QImode; tmode != VOIDmode;
3402 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
3403 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
3406 if (tmode == VOIDmode)
3409 /* Get X and Y in TMODE. We can't use gen_lowpart here because it
3410 may call change_address which is not appropriate if we were
3411 called when a reload was in progress. We don't have to worry
3412 about changing the address since the size in bytes is supposed to
3413 be the same. Copy the MEM to change the mode and move any
3414 substitutions from the old MEM to the new one. */
3416 if (reload_in_progress)
3418 x = gen_lowpart_common (tmode, x1);
3419 if (x == 0 && GET_CODE (x1) == MEM)
3421 x = adjust_address_nv (x1, tmode, 0);
3422 copy_replacements (x1, x);
3425 y = gen_lowpart_common (tmode, y1);
3426 if (y == 0 && GET_CODE (y1) == MEM)
3428 y = adjust_address_nv (y1, tmode, 0);
3429 copy_replacements (y1, y);
3434 x = gen_lowpart (tmode, x);
3435 y = gen_lowpart (tmode, y);
3438 insn_code = mov_optab->handlers[(int) tmode].insn_code;
3439 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (insn_code) (x, y));
3442 /* This will handle any multi-word or full-word mode that lacks a move_insn
3443 pattern. However, you will get better code if you define such patterns,
3444 even if they must turn into multiple assembler instructions. */
3445 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) >= UNITS_PER_WORD)
3452 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3454 /* If X is a push on the stack, do the push now and replace
3455 X with a reference to the stack pointer. */
3456 if (push_operand (x, GET_MODE (x)))
3461 /* Do not use anti_adjust_stack, since we don't want to update
3462 stack_pointer_delta. */
3463 temp = expand_binop (Pmode,
3464 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3472 (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)))),
3473 stack_pointer_rtx, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3475 if (temp != stack_pointer_rtx)
3476 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx, temp);
3478 code = GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0));
3480 /* Just hope that small offsets off SP are OK. */
3481 if (code == POST_INC)
3482 temp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx,
3483 GEN_INT (-((HOST_WIDE_INT)
3484 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)))));
3485 else if (code == POST_DEC)
3486 temp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx,
3487 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))));
3489 temp = stack_pointer_rtx;
3491 x = change_address (x, VOIDmode, temp);
3495 /* If we are in reload, see if either operand is a MEM whose address
3496 is scheduled for replacement. */
3497 if (reload_in_progress && GET_CODE (x) == MEM
3498 && (inner = find_replacement (&XEXP (x, 0))) != XEXP (x, 0))
3499 x = replace_equiv_address_nv (x, inner);
3500 if (reload_in_progress && GET_CODE (y) == MEM
3501 && (inner = find_replacement (&XEXP (y, 0))) != XEXP (y, 0))
3502 y = replace_equiv_address_nv (y, inner);
3508 i < (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
3511 rtx xpart = operand_subword (x, i, 1, mode);
3512 rtx ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode);
3514 /* If we can't get a part of Y, put Y into memory if it is a
3515 constant. Otherwise, force it into a register. If we still
3516 can't get a part of Y, abort. */
3517 if (ypart == 0 && CONSTANT_P (y))
3519 y = force_const_mem (mode, y);
3520 ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode);
3522 else if (ypart == 0)
3523 ypart = operand_subword_force (y, i, mode);
3525 if (xpart == 0 || ypart == 0)
3528 need_clobber |= (GET_CODE (xpart) == SUBREG);
3530 last_insn = emit_move_insn (xpart, ypart);
3536 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3537 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3538 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values.
3539 We never want to emit such a clobber after reload. */
3541 && ! (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
3542 && need_clobber != 0)
3543 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, x));
3553 /* If Y is representable exactly in a narrower mode, and the target can
3554 perform the extension directly from constant or memory, then emit the
3555 move as an extension. */
3558 compress_float_constant (x, y)
3561 enum machine_mode dstmode = GET_MODE (x);
3562 enum machine_mode orig_srcmode = GET_MODE (y);
3563 enum machine_mode srcmode;
3566 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, y);
3568 for (srcmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (GET_MODE_CLASS (orig_srcmode));
3569 srcmode != orig_srcmode;
3570 srcmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode))
3573 rtx trunc_y, last_insn;
3575 /* Skip if the target can't extend this way. */
3576 ic = can_extend_p (dstmode, srcmode, 0);
3577 if (ic == CODE_FOR_nothing)
3580 /* Skip if the narrowed value isn't exact. */
3581 if (! exact_real_truncate (srcmode, &r))
3584 trunc_y = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (r, srcmode);
3586 if (LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (trunc_y))
3588 /* Skip if the target needs extra instructions to perform
3590 if (! (*insn_data[ic].operand[1].predicate) (trunc_y, srcmode))
3593 else if (float_extend_from_mem[dstmode][srcmode])
3594 trunc_y = validize_mem (force_const_mem (srcmode, trunc_y));
3598 emit_unop_insn (ic, x, trunc_y, UNKNOWN);
3599 last_insn = get_last_insn ();
3601 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
3602 REG_NOTES (last_insn)
3603 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (REG_EQUAL, y, REG_NOTES (last_insn));
3611 /* Pushing data onto the stack. */
3613 /* Push a block of length SIZE (perhaps variable)
3614 and return an rtx to address the beginning of the block.
3615 Note that it is not possible for the value returned to be a QUEUED.
3616 The value may be virtual_outgoing_args_rtx.
3618 EXTRA is the number of bytes of padding to push in addition to SIZE.
3619 BELOW nonzero means this padding comes at low addresses;
3620 otherwise, the padding comes at high addresses. */
3623 push_block (size, extra, below)
3629 size = convert_modes (Pmode, ptr_mode, size, 1);
3630 if (CONSTANT_P (size))
3631 anti_adjust_stack (plus_constant (size, extra));
3632 else if (GET_CODE (size) == REG && extra == 0)
3633 anti_adjust_stack (size);
3636 temp = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, size);
3638 temp = expand_binop (Pmode, add_optab, temp, GEN_INT (extra),
3639 temp, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3640 anti_adjust_stack (temp);
3643 #ifndef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3649 temp = virtual_outgoing_args_rtx;
3650 if (extra != 0 && below)
3651 temp = plus_constant (temp, extra);
3655 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
3656 temp = plus_constant (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
3657 -INTVAL (size) - (below ? 0 : extra));
3658 else if (extra != 0 && !below)
3659 temp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
3660 negate_rtx (Pmode, plus_constant (size, extra)));
3662 temp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
3663 negate_rtx (Pmode, size));
3666 return memory_address (GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), temp);
3669 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3671 /* Emit single push insn. */
3674 emit_single_push_insn (mode, x, type)
3676 enum machine_mode mode;
3680 unsigned rounded_size = PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode));
3682 enum insn_code icode;
3683 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred;
3685 stack_pointer_delta += PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode));
3686 /* If there is push pattern, use it. Otherwise try old way of throwing
3687 MEM representing push operation to move expander. */
3688 icode = push_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
3689 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3691 if (((pred = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[0].predicate)
3692 && !((*pred) (x, mode))))
3693 x = force_reg (mode, x);
3694 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (icode) (x));
3697 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == rounded_size)
3698 dest_addr = gen_rtx_fmt_e (STACK_PUSH_CODE, Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx);
3701 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3702 dest_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx,
3703 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT) rounded_size));
3705 dest_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx,
3706 GEN_INT (rounded_size));
3708 dest_addr = gen_rtx_PRE_MODIFY (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx, dest_addr);
3711 dest = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, dest_addr);
3715 set_mem_attributes (dest, type, 1);
3717 if (flag_optimize_sibling_calls)
3718 /* Function incoming arguments may overlap with sibling call
3719 outgoing arguments and we cannot allow reordering of reads
3720 from function arguments with stores to outgoing arguments
3721 of sibling calls. */
3722 set_mem_alias_set (dest, 0);
3724 emit_move_insn (dest, x);
3728 /* Generate code to push X onto the stack, assuming it has mode MODE and
3730 MODE is redundant except when X is a CONST_INT (since they don't
3732 SIZE is an rtx for the size of data to be copied (in bytes),
3733 needed only if X is BLKmode.
3735 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume.
3737 If PARTIAL and REG are both nonzero, then copy that many of the first
3738 words of X into registers starting with REG, and push the rest of X.
3739 The amount of space pushed is decreased by PARTIAL words,
3740 rounded *down* to a multiple of PARM_BOUNDARY.
3741 REG must be a hard register in this case.
3742 If REG is zero but PARTIAL is not, take any all others actions for an
3743 argument partially in registers, but do not actually load any
3746 EXTRA is the amount in bytes of extra space to leave next to this arg.
3747 This is ignored if an argument block has already been allocated.
3749 On a machine that lacks real push insns, ARGS_ADDR is the address of
3750 the bottom of the argument block for this call. We use indexing off there
3751 to store the arg. On machines with push insns, ARGS_ADDR is 0 when a
3752 argument block has not been preallocated.
3754 ARGS_SO_FAR is the size of args previously pushed for this call.
3756 REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is nonzero if functions require stack space
3757 for arguments passed in registers. If nonzero, it will be the number
3758 of bytes required. */
3761 emit_push_insn (x, mode, type, size, align, partial, reg, extra,
3762 args_addr, args_so_far, reg_parm_stack_space,
3765 enum machine_mode mode;
3774 int reg_parm_stack_space;
3778 enum direction stack_direction
3779 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3785 /* Decide where to pad the argument: `downward' for below,
3786 `upward' for above, or `none' for don't pad it.
3787 Default is below for small data on big-endian machines; else above. */
3788 enum direction where_pad = FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type);
3790 /* Invert direction if stack is post-decrement.
3792 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC)
3793 if (where_pad != none)
3794 where_pad = (where_pad == downward ? upward : downward);
3796 xinner = x = protect_from_queue (x, 0);
3798 if (mode == BLKmode)
3800 /* Copy a block into the stack, entirely or partially. */
3803 int used = partial * UNITS_PER_WORD;
3804 int offset = used % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
3812 /* USED is now the # of bytes we need not copy to the stack
3813 because registers will take care of them. */
3816 xinner = adjust_address (xinner, BLKmode, used);
3818 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
3819 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
3820 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
3821 by setting SKIP to 0. */
3822 skip = (reg_parm_stack_space == 0) ? 0 : used;
3824 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3825 /* Do it with several push insns if that doesn't take lots of insns
3826 and if there is no difficulty with push insns that skip bytes
3827 on the stack for alignment purposes. */
3830 && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
3832 && (MOVE_BY_PIECES_P ((unsigned) INTVAL (size) - used, align))
3833 /* Here we avoid the case of a structure whose weak alignment
3834 forces many pushes of a small amount of data,
3835 and such small pushes do rounding that causes trouble. */
3836 && ((! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode, align))
3837 || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
3838 || (PUSH_ROUNDING (align / BITS_PER_UNIT)
3839 == (align / BITS_PER_UNIT)))
3840 && PUSH_ROUNDING (INTVAL (size)) == INTVAL (size))
3842 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3843 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3844 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3845 if (extra && args_addr == 0
3846 && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
3847 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
3849 move_by_pieces (NULL, xinner, INTVAL (size) - used, align);
3852 #endif /* PUSH_ROUNDING */
3856 /* Otherwise make space on the stack and copy the data
3857 to the address of that space. */
3859 /* Deduct words put into registers from the size we must copy. */
3862 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
3863 size = GEN_INT (INTVAL (size) - used);
3865 size = expand_binop (GET_MODE (size), sub_optab, size,
3866 GEN_INT (used), NULL_RTX, 0,
3870 /* Get the address of the stack space.
3871 In this case, we do not deal with EXTRA separately.
3872 A single stack adjust will do. */
3875 temp = push_block (size, extra, where_pad == downward);
3878 else if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT)
3879 temp = memory_address (BLKmode,
3880 plus_constant (args_addr,
3881 skip + INTVAL (args_so_far)));
3883 temp = memory_address (BLKmode,
3884 plus_constant (gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
3889 if (!ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS)
3891 /* If the source is referenced relative to the stack pointer,
3892 copy it to another register to stabilize it. We do not need
3893 to do this if we know that we won't be changing sp. */
3895 if (reg_mentioned_p (virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx, temp)
3896 || reg_mentioned_p (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx, temp))
3897 temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
3900 target = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, temp);
3904 set_mem_attributes (target, type, 1);
3905 /* Function incoming arguments may overlap with sibling call
3906 outgoing arguments and we cannot allow reordering of reads
3907 from function arguments with stores to outgoing arguments
3908 of sibling calls. */
3909 set_mem_alias_set (target, 0);
3912 /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to
3913 PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */
3914 set_mem_align (target, align);
3916 emit_block_move (target, xinner, size, BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM);
3919 else if (partial > 0)
3921 /* Scalar partly in registers. */
3923 int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
3926 /* # words of start of argument
3927 that we must make space for but need not store. */
3928 int offset = partial % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_WORD);
3929 int args_offset = INTVAL (args_so_far);
3932 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3933 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3934 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3935 if (extra && args_addr == 0
3936 && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
3937 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
3939 /* If we make space by pushing it, we might as well push
3940 the real data. Otherwise, we can leave OFFSET nonzero
3941 and leave the space uninitialized. */
3945 /* Now NOT_STACK gets the number of words that we don't need to
3946 allocate on the stack. */
3947 not_stack = partial - offset;
3949 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
3950 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
3951 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
3952 by setting SKIP to 0. */
3953 skip = (reg_parm_stack_space == 0) ? 0 : not_stack;
3955 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x))
3956 x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x));
3958 /* If X is a hard register in a non-integer mode, copy it into a pseudo;
3959 SUBREGs of such registers are not allowed. */
3960 if ((GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3961 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) != MODE_INT))
3962 x = copy_to_reg (x);
3964 /* Loop over all the words allocated on the stack for this arg. */
3965 /* We can do it by words, because any scalar bigger than a word
3966 has a size a multiple of a word. */
3967 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3968 for (i = not_stack; i < size; i++)
3970 for (i = size - 1; i >= not_stack; i--)
3972 if (i >= not_stack + offset)
3973 emit_push_insn (operand_subword_force (x, i, mode),
3974 word_mode, NULL_TREE, NULL_RTX, align, 0, NULL_RTX,
3976 GEN_INT (args_offset + ((i - not_stack + skip)
3978 reg_parm_stack_space, alignment_pad);
3985 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3986 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3987 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3988 if (extra && args_addr == 0
3989 && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
3990 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
3992 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3993 if (args_addr == 0 && PUSH_ARGS)
3994 emit_single_push_insn (mode, x, type);
3998 if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT)
4000 = memory_address (mode,
4001 plus_constant (args_addr,
4002 INTVAL (args_so_far)));
4004 addr = memory_address (mode, gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, args_addr,
4006 dest = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, addr);
4009 set_mem_attributes (dest, type, 1);
4010 /* Function incoming arguments may overlap with sibling call
4011 outgoing arguments and we cannot allow reordering of reads
4012 from function arguments with stores to outgoing arguments
4013 of sibling calls. */
4014 set_mem_alias_set (dest, 0);
4017 emit_move_insn (dest, x);
4021 /* If part should go in registers, copy that part
4022 into the appropriate registers. Do this now, at the end,
4023 since mem-to-mem copies above may do function calls. */
4024 if (partial > 0 && reg != 0)
4026 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4027 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4028 if (GET_CODE (reg) == PARALLEL)
4029 emit_group_load (reg, x, -1); /* ??? size? */
4031 move_block_to_reg (REGNO (reg), x, partial, mode);
4034 if (extra && args_addr == 0 && where_pad == stack_direction)
4035 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
4037 if (alignment_pad && args_addr == 0)
4038 anti_adjust_stack (alignment_pad);
4041 /* Return X if X can be used as a subtarget in a sequence of arithmetic
4049 /* Only registers can be subtargets. */
4050 || GET_CODE (x) != REG
4051 /* If the register is readonly, it can't be set more than once. */
4052 || RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x)
4053 /* Don't use hard regs to avoid extending their life. */
4054 || REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4055 /* Avoid subtargets inside loops,
4056 since they hide some invariant expressions. */
4057 || preserve_subexpressions_p ())
4061 /* Expand an assignment that stores the value of FROM into TO.
4062 If WANT_VALUE is nonzero, return an rtx for the value of TO.
4063 (This may contain a QUEUED rtx;
4064 if the value is constant, this rtx is a constant.)
4065 Otherwise, the returned value is NULL_RTX.
4067 SUGGEST_REG is no longer actually used.
4068 It used to mean, copy the value through a register
4069 and return that register, if that is possible.
4070 We now use WANT_VALUE to decide whether to do this. */
4073 expand_assignment (to, from, want_value, suggest_reg)
4076 int suggest_reg ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4081 /* Don't crash if the lhs of the assignment was erroneous. */
4083 if (TREE_CODE (to) == ERROR_MARK)
4085 result = expand_expr (from, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
4086 return want_value ? result : NULL_RTX;
4089 /* Assignment of a structure component needs special treatment
4090 if the structure component's rtx is not simply a MEM.
4091 Assignment of an array element at a constant index, and assignment of
4092 an array element in an unaligned packed structure field, has the same
4095 if (TREE_CODE (to) == COMPONENT_REF || TREE_CODE (to) == BIT_FIELD_REF
4096 || TREE_CODE (to) == ARRAY_REF || TREE_CODE (to) == ARRAY_RANGE_REF
4097 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (to)) == ARRAY_TYPE)
4099 enum machine_mode mode1;
4100 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, bitpos;
4108 tem = get_inner_reference (to, &bitsize, &bitpos, &offset, &mode1,
4109 &unsignedp, &volatilep);
4111 /* If we are going to use store_bit_field and extract_bit_field,
4112 make sure to_rtx will be safe for multiple use. */
4114 if (mode1 == VOIDmode && want_value)
4115 tem = stabilize_reference (tem);
4117 orig_to_rtx = to_rtx = expand_expr (tem, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
4121 rtx offset_rtx = expand_expr (offset, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
4123 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) != MEM)
4126 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
4127 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode)
4128 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0);
4130 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode)
4131 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0);
4134 /* A constant address in TO_RTX can have VOIDmode, we must not try
4135 to call force_reg for that case. Avoid that case. */
4136 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == MEM
4137 && GET_MODE (to_rtx) == BLKmode
4138 && GET_MODE (XEXP (to_rtx, 0)) != VOIDmode
4140 && (bitpos % bitsize) == 0
4141 && (bitsize % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)) == 0
4142 && MEM_ALIGN (to_rtx) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1))
4144 to_rtx = adjust_address (to_rtx, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
4148 to_rtx = offset_address (to_rtx, offset_rtx,
4149 highest_pow2_factor_for_type (TREE_TYPE (to),
4153 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == MEM)
4155 /* If the field is at offset zero, we could have been given the
4156 DECL_RTX of the parent struct. Don't munge it. */
4157 to_rtx = shallow_copy_rtx (to_rtx);
4159 set_mem_attributes_minus_bitpos (to_rtx, to, 0, bitpos);
4162 /* Deal with volatile and readonly fields. The former is only done
4163 for MEM. Also set MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P if needed. */
4164 if (volatilep && GET_CODE (to_rtx) == MEM)
4166 if (to_rtx == orig_to_rtx)
4167 to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx);
4168 MEM_VOLATILE_P (to_rtx) = 1;
4171 if (TREE_CODE (to) == COMPONENT_REF
4172 && TREE_READONLY (TREE_OPERAND (to, 1)))
4174 if (to_rtx == orig_to_rtx)
4175 to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx);
4176 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (to_rtx) = 1;
4179 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == MEM && ! can_address_p (to))
4181 if (to_rtx == orig_to_rtx)
4182 to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx);
4183 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) = 1;
4186 result = store_field (to_rtx, bitsize, bitpos, mode1, from,
4188 /* Spurious cast for HPUX compiler. */
4189 ? ((enum machine_mode)
4190 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (to)))
4192 unsignedp, TREE_TYPE (tem), get_alias_set (to));
4194 preserve_temp_slots (result);
4198 /* If the value is meaningful, convert RESULT to the proper mode.
4199 Otherwise, return nothing. */
4200 return (want_value ? convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (to)),
4201 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (from)),
4203 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (to)))
4207 /* If the rhs is a function call and its value is not an aggregate,
4208 call the function before we start to compute the lhs.
4209 This is needed for correct code for cases such as
4210 val = setjmp (buf) on machines where reference to val
4211 requires loading up part of an address in a separate insn.
4213 Don't do this if TO is a VAR_DECL or PARM_DECL whose DECL_RTL is REG
4214 since it might be a promoted variable where the zero- or sign- extension
4215 needs to be done. Handling this in the normal way is safe because no
4216 computation is done before the call. */
4217 if (TREE_CODE (from) == CALL_EXPR && ! aggregate_value_p (from)
4218 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (from))) == INTEGER_CST
4219 && ! ((TREE_CODE (to) == VAR_DECL || TREE_CODE (to) == PARM_DECL)
4220 && GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (to)) == REG))
4225 value = expand_expr (from, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
4227 to_rtx = expand_expr (to, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_WRITE);
4229 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4230 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4231 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL)
4232 emit_group_load (to_rtx, value, int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from)));
4233 else if (GET_MODE (to_rtx) == BLKmode)
4234 emit_block_move (to_rtx, value, expr_size (from), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
4237 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
4238 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (to))
4239 && GET_MODE (to_rtx) != GET_MODE (value))
4240 value = convert_memory_address (GET_MODE (to_rtx), value);
4242 emit_move_insn (to_rtx, value);
4244 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx);
4247 return want_value ? to_rtx : NULL_RTX;
4250 /* Ordinary treatment. Expand TO to get a REG or MEM rtx.
4251 Don't re-expand if it was expanded already (in COMPONENT_REF case). */
4254 to_rtx = expand_expr (to, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_WRITE);
4256 /* Don't move directly into a return register. */
4257 if (TREE_CODE (to) == RESULT_DECL
4258 && (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == REG || GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL))
4263 temp = expand_expr (from, 0, GET_MODE (to_rtx), 0);
4265 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL)
4266 emit_group_load (to_rtx, temp, int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from)));
4268 emit_move_insn (to_rtx, temp);
4270 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx);
4273 return want_value ? to_rtx : NULL_RTX;
4276 /* In case we are returning the contents of an object which overlaps
4277 the place the value is being stored, use a safe function when copying
4278 a value through a pointer into a structure value return block. */
4279 if (TREE_CODE (to) == RESULT_DECL && TREE_CODE (from) == INDIRECT_REF
4280 && current_function_returns_struct
4281 && !current_function_returns_pcc_struct)
4286 size = expr_size (from);
4287 from_rtx = expand_expr (from, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
4289 if (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS)
4290 emit_library_call (memmove_libfunc, LCT_NORMAL,
4291 VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (to_rtx, 0), Pmode,
4292 XEXP (from_rtx, 0), Pmode,
4293 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (sizetype),
4294 size, TREE_UNSIGNED (sizetype)),
4295 TYPE_MODE (sizetype));
4297 emit_library_call (bcopy_libfunc, LCT_NORMAL,
4298 VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (from_rtx, 0), Pmode,
4299 XEXP (to_rtx, 0), Pmode,
4300 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node),
4302 TREE_UNSIGNED (integer_type_node)),
4303 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node));
4305 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx);
4308 return want_value ? to_rtx : NULL_RTX;
4311 /* Compute FROM and store the value in the rtx we got. */
4314 result = store_expr (from, to_rtx, want_value);
4315 preserve_temp_slots (result);
4318 return want_value ? result : NULL_RTX;
4321 /* Generate code for computing expression EXP,
4322 and storing the value into TARGET.
4323 TARGET may contain a QUEUED rtx.
4325 If WANT_VALUE & 1 is nonzero, return a copy of the value
4326 not in TARGET, so that we can be sure to use the proper
4327 value in a containing expression even if TARGET has something
4328 else stored in it. If possible, we copy the value through a pseudo
4329 and return that pseudo. Or, if the value is constant, we try to
4330 return the constant. In some cases, we return a pseudo
4331 copied *from* TARGET.
4333 If the mode is BLKmode then we may return TARGET itself.
4334 It turns out that in BLKmode it doesn't cause a problem.
4335 because C has no operators that could combine two different
4336 assignments into the same BLKmode object with different values
4337 with no sequence point. Will other languages need this to
4340 If WANT_VALUE & 1 is 0, we return NULL, to make sure
4341 to catch quickly any cases where the caller uses the value
4342 and fails to set WANT_VALUE.
4344 If WANT_VALUE & 2 is set, this is a store into a call param on the
4345 stack, and block moves may need to be treated specially. */
4348 store_expr (exp, target, want_value)
4354 int dont_return_target = 0;
4355 int dont_store_target = 0;
4357 if (VOID_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
4359 /* C++ can generate ?: expressions with a throw expression in one
4360 branch and an rvalue in the other. Here, we resolve attempts to
4361 store the throw expression's nonexistant result. */
4364 expand_expr (exp, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
4367 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPOUND_EXPR)
4369 /* Perform first part of compound expression, then assign from second
4371 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode,
4372 want_value & 2 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL);
4374 return store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, want_value);
4376 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COND_EXPR && GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode)
4378 /* For conditional expression, get safe form of the target. Then
4379 test the condition, doing the appropriate assignment on either
4380 side. This avoids the creation of unnecessary temporaries.
4381 For non-BLKmode, it is more efficient not to do this. */
4383 rtx lab1 = gen_label_rtx (), lab2 = gen_label_rtx ();
4386 target = protect_from_queue (target, 1);
4388 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
4390 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), lab1);
4391 start_cleanup_deferral ();
4392 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, want_value & 2);
4393 end_cleanup_deferral ();
4395 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (lab2));
4398 start_cleanup_deferral ();
4399 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), target, want_value & 2);
4400 end_cleanup_deferral ();
4405 return want_value & 1 ? target : NULL_RTX;
4407 else if (queued_subexp_p (target))
4408 /* If target contains a postincrement, let's not risk
4409 using it as the place to generate the rhs. */
4411 if (GET_MODE (target) != BLKmode && GET_MODE (target) != VOIDmode)
4413 /* Expand EXP into a new pseudo. */
4414 temp = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target));
4415 temp = expand_expr (exp, temp, GET_MODE (target),
4417 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL));
4420 temp = expand_expr (exp, NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (target),
4422 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL));
4424 /* If target is volatile, ANSI requires accessing the value
4425 *from* the target, if it is accessed. So make that happen.
4426 In no case return the target itself. */
4427 if (! MEM_VOLATILE_P (target) && (want_value & 1) != 0)
4428 dont_return_target = 1;
4430 else if ((want_value & 1) != 0
4431 && GET_CODE (target) == MEM
4432 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (target)
4433 && GET_MODE (target) != BLKmode)
4434 /* If target is in memory and caller wants value in a register instead,
4435 arrange that. Pass TARGET as target for expand_expr so that,
4436 if EXP is another assignment, WANT_VALUE will be nonzero for it.
4437 We know expand_expr will not use the target in that case.
4438 Don't do this if TARGET is volatile because we are supposed
4439 to write it and then read it. */
4441 temp = expand_expr (exp, target, GET_MODE (target),
4442 want_value & 2 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL);
4443 if (GET_MODE (temp) != BLKmode && GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode)
4445 /* If TEMP is already in the desired TARGET, only copy it from
4446 memory and don't store it there again. */
4448 || (rtx_equal_p (temp, target)
4449 && ! side_effects_p (temp) && ! side_effects_p (target)))
4450 dont_store_target = 1;
4451 temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
4453 dont_return_target = 1;
4455 else if (GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (target))
4456 /* If this is a scalar in a register that is stored in a wider mode
4457 than the declared mode, compute the result into its declared mode
4458 and then convert to the wider mode. Our value is the computed
4461 rtx inner_target = 0;
4463 /* If we don't want a value, we can do the conversion inside EXP,
4464 which will often result in some optimizations. Do the conversion
4465 in two steps: first change the signedness, if needed, then
4466 the extend. But don't do this if the type of EXP is a subtype
4467 of something else since then the conversion might involve
4468 more than just converting modes. */
4469 if ((want_value & 1) == 0
4470 && INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp))
4471 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == 0)
4473 if (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp))
4474 != SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target))
4476 ((*lang_hooks.types.signed_or_unsigned_type)
4477 (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target), TREE_TYPE (exp)), exp);
4479 exp = convert ((*lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode)
4480 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target)),
4481 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target)),
4484 inner_target = SUBREG_REG (target);
4487 temp = expand_expr (exp, inner_target, VOIDmode,
4488 want_value & 2 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL);
4490 /* If TEMP is a MEM and we want a result value, make the access
4491 now so it gets done only once. Strictly speaking, this is
4492 only necessary if the MEM is volatile, or if the address
4493 overlaps TARGET. But not performing the load twice also
4494 reduces the amount of rtl we generate and then have to CSE. */
4495 if (GET_CODE (temp) == MEM && (want_value & 1) != 0)
4496 temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
4498 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant, use convert_modes to make
4499 sure that we properly convert it. */
4500 if (CONSTANT_P (temp) && GET_MODE (temp) == VOIDmode)
4502 temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (target), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
4503 temp, SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4504 temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target)),
4505 GET_MODE (target), temp,
4506 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4509 convert_move (SUBREG_REG (target), temp,
4510 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4512 /* If we promoted a constant, change the mode back down to match
4513 target. Otherwise, the caller might get confused by a result whose
4514 mode is larger than expected. */
4516 if ((want_value & 1) != 0 && GET_MODE (temp) != GET_MODE (target))
4518 if (GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode)
4520 temp = gen_lowpart_SUBREG (GET_MODE (target), temp);
4521 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp) = 1;
4522 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_SET (temp,
4523 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4526 temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (target),
4527 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target)),
4528 temp, SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4531 return want_value & 1 ? temp : NULL_RTX;
4535 temp = expand_expr (exp, target, GET_MODE (target),
4536 want_value & 2 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL);
4537 /* Return TARGET if it's a specified hardware register.
4538 If TARGET is a volatile mem ref, either return TARGET
4539 or return a reg copied *from* TARGET; ANSI requires this.
4541 Otherwise, if TEMP is not TARGET, return TEMP
4542 if it is constant (for efficiency),
4543 or if we really want the correct value. */
4544 if (!(target && GET_CODE (target) == REG
4545 && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
4546 && !(GET_CODE (target) == MEM && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target))
4547 && ! rtx_equal_p (temp, target)
4548 && (CONSTANT_P (temp) || (want_value & 1) != 0))
4549 dont_return_target = 1;
4552 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant and the mode of the type of EXP is not
4553 the same as that of TARGET, adjust the constant. This is needed, for
4554 example, in case it is a CONST_DOUBLE and we want only a word-sized
4556 if (CONSTANT_P (temp) && GET_MODE (temp) == VOIDmode
4557 && TREE_CODE (exp) != ERROR_MARK
4558 && GET_MODE (target) != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
4559 temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (target), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
4560 temp, TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
4562 /* If value was not generated in the target, store it there.
4563 Convert the value to TARGET's type first if necessary.
4564 If TEMP and TARGET compare equal according to rtx_equal_p, but
4565 one or both of them are volatile memory refs, we have to distinguish
4567 - expand_expr has used TARGET. In this case, we must not generate
4568 another copy. This can be detected by TARGET being equal according
4570 - expand_expr has not used TARGET - that means that the source just
4571 happens to have the same RTX form. Since temp will have been created
4572 by expand_expr, it will compare unequal according to == .
4573 We must generate a copy in this case, to reach the correct number
4574 of volatile memory references. */
4576 if ((! rtx_equal_p (temp, target)
4577 || (temp != target && (side_effects_p (temp)
4578 || side_effects_p (target))))
4579 && TREE_CODE (exp) != ERROR_MARK
4580 && ! dont_store_target
4581 /* If store_expr stores a DECL whose DECL_RTL(exp) == TARGET,
4582 but TARGET is not valid memory reference, TEMP will differ
4583 from TARGET although it is really the same location. */
4584 && (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp)) != 'd'
4585 || target != DECL_RTL_IF_SET (exp))
4586 /* If there's nothing to copy, don't bother. Don't call expr_size
4587 unless necessary, because some front-ends (C++) expr_size-hook
4588 aborts on objects that are not supposed to be bit-copied or
4590 && expr_size (exp) != const0_rtx)
4592 target = protect_from_queue (target, 1);
4593 if (GET_MODE (temp) != GET_MODE (target)
4594 && GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode)
4596 int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
4597 if (dont_return_target)
4599 /* In this case, we will return TEMP,
4600 so make sure it has the proper mode.
4601 But don't forget to store the value into TARGET. */
4602 temp = convert_to_mode (GET_MODE (target), temp, unsignedp);
4603 emit_move_insn (target, temp);
4606 convert_move (target, temp, unsignedp);
4609 else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode && TREE_CODE (exp) == STRING_CST)
4611 /* Handle copying a string constant into an array. The string
4612 constant may be shorter than the array. So copy just the string's
4613 actual length, and clear the rest. First get the size of the data
4614 type of the string, which is actually the size of the target. */
4615 rtx size = expr_size (exp);
4617 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
4618 && INTVAL (size) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp))
4619 emit_block_move (target, temp, size,
4621 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
4624 /* Compute the size of the data to copy from the string. */
4626 = size_binop (MIN_EXPR,
4627 make_tree (sizetype, size),
4628 size_int (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp)));
4630 = expand_expr (copy_size, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode,
4632 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL));
4635 /* Copy that much. */
4636 copy_size_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, copy_size_rtx,
4637 TREE_UNSIGNED (sizetype));
4638 emit_block_move (target, temp, copy_size_rtx,
4640 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
4642 /* Figure out how much is left in TARGET that we have to clear.
4643 Do all calculations in ptr_mode. */
4644 if (GET_CODE (copy_size_rtx) == CONST_INT)
4646 size = plus_constant (size, -INTVAL (copy_size_rtx));
4647 target = adjust_address (target, BLKmode,
4648 INTVAL (copy_size_rtx));
4652 size = expand_binop (TYPE_MODE (sizetype), sub_optab, size,
4653 copy_size_rtx, NULL_RTX, 0,
4656 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
4657 if (GET_MODE (copy_size_rtx) != Pmode)
4658 copy_size_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, copy_size_rtx,
4659 TREE_UNSIGNED (sizetype));
4662 target = offset_address (target, copy_size_rtx,
4663 highest_pow2_factor (copy_size));
4664 label = gen_label_rtx ();
4665 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (size, const0_rtx, LT, NULL_RTX,
4666 GET_MODE (size), 0, label);
4669 if (size != const0_rtx)
4670 clear_storage (target, size);
4676 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4677 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4678 else if (GET_CODE (target) == PARALLEL)
4679 emit_group_load (target, temp, int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
4680 else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode)
4681 emit_block_move (target, temp, expr_size (exp),
4683 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
4685 emit_move_insn (target, temp);
4688 /* If we don't want a value, return NULL_RTX. */
4689 if ((want_value & 1) == 0)
4692 /* If we are supposed to return TEMP, do so as long as it isn't a MEM.
4693 ??? The latter test doesn't seem to make sense. */
4694 else if (dont_return_target && GET_CODE (temp) != MEM)
4697 /* Return TARGET itself if it is a hard register. */
4698 else if ((want_value & 1) != 0
4699 && GET_MODE (target) != BLKmode
4700 && ! (GET_CODE (target) == REG
4701 && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
4702 return copy_to_reg (target);
4708 /* Return 1 if EXP just contains zeros. */
4716 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
4720 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR:
4721 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR:
4722 return is_zeros_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
4725 return integer_zerop (exp);
4729 is_zeros_p (TREE_REALPART (exp)) && is_zeros_p (TREE_IMAGPART (exp));
4732 return REAL_VALUES_IDENTICAL (TREE_REAL_CST (exp), dconst0);
4735 for (elt = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (exp); elt;
4736 elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
4737 if (!is_zeros_p (TREE_VALUE (elt)))
4743 if (TREE_TYPE (exp) && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == SET_TYPE)
4744 return CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp) == NULL_TREE;
4745 for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp); elt; elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
4746 if (! is_zeros_p (TREE_VALUE (elt)))
4756 /* Return 1 if EXP contains mostly (3/4) zeros. */
4759 mostly_zeros_p (exp)
4762 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR)
4764 int elts = 0, zeros = 0;
4765 tree elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp);
4766 if (TREE_TYPE (exp) && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == SET_TYPE)
4768 /* If there are no ranges of true bits, it is all zero. */
4769 return elt == NULL_TREE;
4771 for (; elt; elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
4773 /* We do not handle the case where the index is a RANGE_EXPR,
4774 so the statistic will be somewhat inaccurate.
4775 We do make a more accurate count in store_constructor itself,
4776 so since this function is only used for nested array elements,
4777 this should be close enough. */
4778 if (mostly_zeros_p (TREE_VALUE (elt)))
4783 return 4 * zeros >= 3 * elts;
4786 return is_zeros_p (exp);
4789 /* Helper function for store_constructor.
4790 TARGET, BITSIZE, BITPOS, MODE, EXP are as for store_field.
4791 TYPE is the type of the CONSTRUCTOR, not the element type.
4792 CLEARED is as for store_constructor.
4793 ALIAS_SET is the alias set to use for any stores.
4795 This provides a recursive shortcut back to store_constructor when it isn't
4796 necessary to go through store_field. This is so that we can pass through
4797 the cleared field to let store_constructor know that we may not have to
4798 clear a substructure if the outer structure has already been cleared. */
4801 store_constructor_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, type, cleared,
4804 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize;
4805 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos;
4806 enum machine_mode mode;
4811 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR
4812 && bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0
4813 /* If we have a nonzero bitpos for a register target, then we just
4814 let store_field do the bitfield handling. This is unlikely to
4815 generate unnecessary clear instructions anyways. */
4816 && (bitpos == 0 || GET_CODE (target) == MEM))
4818 if (GET_CODE (target) == MEM)
4820 = adjust_address (target,
4821 GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode
4823 % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (GET_MODE (target)))
4824 ? BLKmode : VOIDmode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
4827 /* Update the alias set, if required. */
4828 if (GET_CODE (target) == MEM && ! MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target)
4829 && MEM_ALIAS_SET (target) != 0)
4831 target = copy_rtx (target);
4832 set_mem_alias_set (target, alias_set);
4835 store_constructor (exp, target, cleared, bitsize / BITS_PER_UNIT);
4838 store_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, VOIDmode, 0, type,
4842 /* Store the value of constructor EXP into the rtx TARGET.
4843 TARGET is either a REG or a MEM; we know it cannot conflict, since
4844 safe_from_p has been called.
4845 CLEARED is true if TARGET is known to have been zero'd.
4846 SIZE is the number of bytes of TARGET we are allowed to modify: this
4847 may not be the same as the size of EXP if we are assigning to a field
4848 which has been packed to exclude padding bits. */
4851 store_constructor (exp, target, cleared, size)
4857 tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp);
4858 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
4859 HOST_WIDE_INT exp_size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
4862 if (TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE || TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE
4863 || TREE_CODE (type) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE)
4867 /* We either clear the aggregate or indicate the value is dead. */
4868 if ((TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE
4869 || TREE_CODE (type) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE)
4871 && ! CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp))
4872 /* If the constructor is empty, clear the union. */
4874 clear_storage (target, expr_size (exp));
4878 /* If we are building a static constructor into a register,
4879 set the initial value as zero so we can fold the value into
4880 a constant. But if more than one register is involved,
4881 this probably loses. */
4882 else if (! cleared && GET_CODE (target) == REG && TREE_STATIC (exp)
4883 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
4885 emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target)));
4889 /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure
4890 or if we are initializing the structure to mostly zeros,
4891 clear the whole structure first. Don't do this if TARGET is a
4892 register whose mode size isn't equal to SIZE since clear_storage
4893 can't handle this case. */
4894 else if (! cleared && size > 0
4895 && ((list_length (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp))
4896 != fields_length (type))
4897 || mostly_zeros_p (exp))
4898 && (GET_CODE (target) != REG
4899 || ((HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target))
4902 rtx xtarget = target;
4904 if (readonly_fields_p (type))
4906 xtarget = copy_rtx (xtarget);
4907 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (xtarget) = 1;
4910 clear_storage (xtarget, GEN_INT (size));
4915 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, target));
4917 /* Store each element of the constructor into
4918 the corresponding field of TARGET. */
4920 for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp); elt; elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
4922 tree field = TREE_PURPOSE (elt);
4923 tree value = TREE_VALUE (elt);
4924 enum machine_mode mode;
4925 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize;
4926 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = 0;
4928 rtx to_rtx = target;
4930 /* Just ignore missing fields.
4931 We cleared the whole structure, above,
4932 if any fields are missing. */
4936 if (cleared && is_zeros_p (value))
4939 if (host_integerp (DECL_SIZE (field), 1))
4940 bitsize = tree_low_cst (DECL_SIZE (field), 1);
4944 mode = DECL_MODE (field);
4945 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field))
4948 offset = DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field);
4949 if (host_integerp (offset, 0)
4950 && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 0))
4952 bitpos = int_bit_position (field);
4956 bitpos = tree_low_cst (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field), 0);
4962 if (contains_placeholder_p (offset))
4963 offset = build (WITH_RECORD_EXPR, sizetype,
4964 offset, make_tree (TREE_TYPE (exp), target));
4966 offset_rtx = expand_expr (offset, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
4967 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) != MEM)
4970 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
4971 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode)
4972 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0);
4974 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode)
4975 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0);
4978 to_rtx = offset_address (to_rtx, offset_rtx,
4979 highest_pow2_factor (offset));
4982 if (TREE_READONLY (field))
4984 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == MEM)
4985 to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx);
4987 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (to_rtx) = 1;
4990 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
4991 /* If this initializes a field that is smaller than a word, at the
4992 start of a word, try to widen it to a full word.
4993 This special case allows us to output C++ member function
4994 initializations in a form that the optimizers can understand. */
4995 if (GET_CODE (target) == REG
4996 && bitsize < BITS_PER_WORD
4997 && bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0
4998 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4999 && TREE_CODE (value) == INTEGER_CST
5001 && bitpos + BITS_PER_WORD <= exp_size * BITS_PER_UNIT)
5003 tree type = TREE_TYPE (value);
5005 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) < BITS_PER_WORD)
5007 type = (*lang_hooks.types.type_for_size)
5008 (BITS_PER_WORD, TREE_UNSIGNED (type));
5009 value = convert (type, value);
5012 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
5014 = fold (build (LSHIFT_EXPR, type, value,
5015 build_int_2 (BITS_PER_WORD - bitsize, 0)));
5016 bitsize = BITS_PER_WORD;
5021 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == MEM && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx)
5022 && DECL_NONADDRESSABLE_P (field))
5024 to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx);
5025 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) = 1;
5028 store_constructor_field (to_rtx, bitsize, bitpos, mode,
5029 value, type, cleared,
5030 get_alias_set (TREE_TYPE (field)));
5033 else if (TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE
5034 || TREE_CODE (type) == VECTOR_TYPE)
5039 tree domain = TYPE_DOMAIN (type);
5040 tree elttype = TREE_TYPE (type);
5042 HOST_WIDE_INT minelt = 0;
5043 HOST_WIDE_INT maxelt = 0;
5045 /* Vectors are like arrays, but the domain is stored via an array
5047 if (TREE_CODE (type) == VECTOR_TYPE)
5049 /* Note that although TYPE_DEBUG_REPRESENTATION_TYPE uses
5050 the same field as TYPE_DOMAIN, we are not guaranteed that
5052 domain = TYPE_DEBUG_REPRESENTATION_TYPE (type);
5053 domain = TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TYPE_FIELDS (domain)));
5056 const_bounds_p = (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain)
5057 && TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain)
5058 && host_integerp (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain), 0)
5059 && host_integerp (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain), 0));
5061 /* If we have constant bounds for the range of the type, get them. */
5064 minelt = tree_low_cst (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain), 0);
5065 maxelt = tree_low_cst (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain), 0);
5068 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the array,
5069 clear the whole array first. Similarly if this is
5070 static constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
5071 if (cleared || (GET_CODE (target) == REG && TREE_STATIC (exp)))
5075 HOST_WIDE_INT count = 0, zero_count = 0;
5076 need_to_clear = ! const_bounds_p;
5078 /* This loop is a more accurate version of the loop in
5079 mostly_zeros_p (it handles RANGE_EXPR in an index).
5080 It is also needed to check for missing elements. */
5081 for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp);
5082 elt != NULL_TREE && ! need_to_clear;
5083 elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
5085 tree index = TREE_PURPOSE (elt);
5086 HOST_WIDE_INT this_node_count;
5088 if (index != NULL_TREE && TREE_CODE (index) == RANGE_EXPR)
5090 tree lo_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 0);
5091 tree hi_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 1);
5093 if (! host_integerp (lo_index, 1)
5094 || ! host_integerp (hi_index, 1))
5100 this_node_count = (tree_low_cst (hi_index, 1)
5101 - tree_low_cst (lo_index, 1) + 1);
5104 this_node_count = 1;
5106 count += this_node_count;
5107 if (mostly_zeros_p (TREE_VALUE (elt)))
5108 zero_count += this_node_count;
5111 /* Clear the entire array first if there are any missing elements,
5112 or if the incidence of zero elements is >= 75%. */
5114 && (count < maxelt - minelt + 1 || 4 * zero_count >= 3 * count))
5118 if (need_to_clear && size > 0)
5123 emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target)));
5125 clear_storage (target, GEN_INT (size));
5129 else if (REG_P (target))
5130 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
5131 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, target));
5133 /* Store each element of the constructor into
5134 the corresponding element of TARGET, determined
5135 by counting the elements. */
5136 for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), i = 0;
5138 elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt), i++)
5140 enum machine_mode mode;
5141 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize;
5142 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos;
5144 tree value = TREE_VALUE (elt);
5145 tree index = TREE_PURPOSE (elt);
5146 rtx xtarget = target;
5148 if (cleared && is_zeros_p (value))
5151 unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (elttype);
5152 mode = TYPE_MODE (elttype);
5153 if (mode == BLKmode)
5154 bitsize = (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)
5155 ? tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)
5158 bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
5160 if (index != NULL_TREE && TREE_CODE (index) == RANGE_EXPR)
5162 tree lo_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 0);
5163 tree hi_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 1);
5164 rtx index_r, pos_rtx, loop_end;
5165 struct nesting *loop;
5166 HOST_WIDE_INT lo, hi, count;
5169 /* If the range is constant and "small", unroll the loop. */
5171 && host_integerp (lo_index, 0)
5172 && host_integerp (hi_index, 0)
5173 && (lo = tree_low_cst (lo_index, 0),
5174 hi = tree_low_cst (hi_index, 0),
5175 count = hi - lo + 1,
5176 (GET_CODE (target) != MEM
5178 || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)
5179 && (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1) * count
5182 lo -= minelt; hi -= minelt;
5183 for (; lo <= hi; lo++)
5185 bitpos = lo * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 0);
5187 if (GET_CODE (target) == MEM
5188 && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target)
5189 && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE
5190 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type))
5192 target = copy_rtx (target);
5193 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target) = 1;
5196 store_constructor_field
5197 (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, value, type, cleared,
5198 get_alias_set (elttype));
5203 expand_expr (hi_index, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
5204 loop_end = gen_label_rtx ();
5206 unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (domain);
5208 index = build_decl (VAR_DECL, NULL_TREE, domain);
5211 = gen_reg_rtx (promote_mode (domain, DECL_MODE (index),
5213 SET_DECL_RTL (index, index_r);
5214 if (TREE_CODE (value) == SAVE_EXPR
5215 && SAVE_EXPR_RTL (value) == 0)
5217 /* Make sure value gets expanded once before the
5219 expand_expr (value, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
5222 store_expr (lo_index, index_r, 0);
5223 loop = expand_start_loop (0);
5225 /* Assign value to element index. */
5227 = convert (ssizetype,
5228 fold (build (MINUS_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (index),
5229 index, TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain))));
5230 position = size_binop (MULT_EXPR, position,
5232 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype)));
5234 pos_rtx = expand_expr (position, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
5235 xtarget = offset_address (target, pos_rtx,
5236 highest_pow2_factor (position));
5237 xtarget = adjust_address (xtarget, mode, 0);
5238 if (TREE_CODE (value) == CONSTRUCTOR)
5239 store_constructor (value, xtarget, cleared,
5240 bitsize / BITS_PER_UNIT);
5242 store_expr (value, xtarget, 0);
5244 expand_exit_loop_if_false (loop,
5245 build (LT_EXPR, integer_type_node,
5248 expand_increment (build (PREINCREMENT_EXPR,
5250 index, integer_one_node), 0, 0);
5252 emit_label (loop_end);
5255 else if ((index != 0 && ! host_integerp (index, 0))
5256 || ! host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1))
5261 index = ssize_int (1);
5264 index = convert (ssizetype,
5265 fold (build (MINUS_EXPR, index,
5266 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain))));
5268 position = size_binop (MULT_EXPR, index,
5270 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype)));
5271 xtarget = offset_address (target,
5272 expand_expr (position, 0, VOIDmode, 0),
5273 highest_pow2_factor (position));
5274 xtarget = adjust_address (xtarget, mode, 0);
5275 store_expr (value, xtarget, 0);
5280 bitpos = ((tree_low_cst (index, 0) - minelt)
5281 * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1));
5283 bitpos = (i * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1));
5285 if (GET_CODE (target) == MEM && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target)
5286 && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE
5287 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type))
5289 target = copy_rtx (target);
5290 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target) = 1;
5293 store_constructor_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, value,
5294 type, cleared, get_alias_set (elttype));
5300 /* Set constructor assignments. */
5301 else if (TREE_CODE (type) == SET_TYPE)
5303 tree elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp);
5304 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nbytes = int_size_in_bytes (type), nbits;
5305 tree domain = TYPE_DOMAIN (type);
5306 tree domain_min, domain_max, bitlength;
5308 /* The default implementation strategy is to extract the constant
5309 parts of the constructor, use that to initialize the target,
5310 and then "or" in whatever non-constant ranges we need in addition.
5312 If a large set is all zero or all ones, it is
5313 probably better to set it using memset (if available) or bzero.
5314 Also, if a large set has just a single range, it may also be
5315 better to first clear all the first clear the set (using
5316 bzero/memset), and set the bits we want. */
5318 /* Check for all zeros. */
5319 if (elt == NULL_TREE && size > 0)
5322 clear_storage (target, GEN_INT (size));
5326 domain_min = convert (sizetype, TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain));
5327 domain_max = convert (sizetype, TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain));
5328 bitlength = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR,
5329 size_diffop (domain_max, domain_min),
5332 nbits = tree_low_cst (bitlength, 1);
5334 /* For "small" sets, or "medium-sized" (up to 32 bytes) sets that
5335 are "complicated" (more than one range), initialize (the
5336 constant parts) by copying from a constant. */
5337 if (GET_MODE (target) != BLKmode || nbits <= 2 * BITS_PER_WORD
5338 || (nbytes <= 32 && TREE_CHAIN (elt) != NULL_TREE))
5340 unsigned int set_word_size = TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5341 enum machine_mode mode = mode_for_size (set_word_size, MODE_INT, 1);
5342 char *bit_buffer = (char *) alloca (nbits);
5343 HOST_WIDE_INT word = 0;
5344 unsigned int bit_pos = 0;
5345 unsigned int ibit = 0;
5346 unsigned int offset = 0; /* In bytes from beginning of set. */
5348 elt = get_set_constructor_bits (exp, bit_buffer, nbits);
5351 if (bit_buffer[ibit])
5353 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
5354 word |= (1 << (set_word_size - 1 - bit_pos));
5356 word |= 1 << bit_pos;
5360 if (bit_pos >= set_word_size || ibit == nbits)
5362 if (word != 0 || ! cleared)
5364 rtx datum = GEN_INT (word);
5367 /* The assumption here is that it is safe to use
5368 XEXP if the set is multi-word, but not if
5369 it's single-word. */
5370 if (GET_CODE (target) == MEM)
5371 to_rtx = adjust_address (target, mode, offset);
5372 else if (offset == 0)
5376 emit_move_insn (to_rtx, datum);
5383 offset += set_word_size / BITS_PER_UNIT;
5388 /* Don't bother clearing storage if the set is all ones. */
5389 if (TREE_CHAIN (elt) != NULL_TREE
5390 || (TREE_PURPOSE (elt) == NULL_TREE
5392 : ( ! host_integerp (TREE_VALUE (elt), 0)
5393 || ! host_integerp (TREE_PURPOSE (elt), 0)
5394 || (tree_low_cst (TREE_VALUE (elt), 0)
5395 - tree_low_cst (TREE_PURPOSE (elt), 0) + 1
5396 != (HOST_WIDE_INT) nbits))))
5397 clear_storage (target, expr_size (exp));
5399 for (; elt != NULL_TREE; elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
5401 /* Start of range of element or NULL. */
5402 tree startbit = TREE_PURPOSE (elt);
5403 /* End of range of element, or element value. */
5404 tree endbit = TREE_VALUE (elt);
5405 HOST_WIDE_INT startb, endb;
5406 rtx bitlength_rtx, startbit_rtx, endbit_rtx, targetx;
5408 bitlength_rtx = expand_expr (bitlength,
5409 NULL_RTX, MEM, EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS);
5411 /* Handle non-range tuple element like [ expr ]. */
5412 if (startbit == NULL_TREE)
5414 startbit = save_expr (endbit);
5418 startbit = convert (sizetype, startbit);
5419 endbit = convert (sizetype, endbit);
5420 if (! integer_zerop (domain_min))
5422 startbit = size_binop (MINUS_EXPR, startbit, domain_min);
5423 endbit = size_binop (MINUS_EXPR, endbit, domain_min);
5425 startbit_rtx = expand_expr (startbit, NULL_RTX, MEM,
5426 EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS);
5427 endbit_rtx = expand_expr (endbit, NULL_RTX, MEM,
5428 EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS);
5434 ((build_qualified_type ((*lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode)
5435 (GET_MODE (target), 0),
5438 emit_move_insn (targetx, target);
5441 else if (GET_CODE (target) == MEM)
5446 /* Optimization: If startbit and endbit are constants divisible
5447 by BITS_PER_UNIT, call memset instead. */
5448 if (TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
5449 && TREE_CODE (startbit) == INTEGER_CST
5450 && TREE_CODE (endbit) == INTEGER_CST
5451 && (startb = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (startbit)) % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0
5452 && (endb = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (endbit) + 1) % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0)
5454 emit_library_call (memset_libfunc, LCT_NORMAL,
5456 plus_constant (XEXP (targetx, 0),
5457 startb / BITS_PER_UNIT),
5459 constm1_rtx, TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node),
5460 GEN_INT ((endb - startb) / BITS_PER_UNIT),
5461 TYPE_MODE (sizetype));
5464 emit_library_call (setbits_libfunc, LCT_NORMAL,
5465 VOIDmode, 4, XEXP (targetx, 0),
5466 Pmode, bitlength_rtx, TYPE_MODE (sizetype),
5467 startbit_rtx, TYPE_MODE (sizetype),
5468 endbit_rtx, TYPE_MODE (sizetype));
5471 emit_move_insn (target, targetx);
5479 /* Store the value of EXP (an expression tree)
5480 into a subfield of TARGET which has mode MODE and occupies
5481 BITSIZE bits, starting BITPOS bits from the start of TARGET.
5482 If MODE is VOIDmode, it means that we are storing into a bit-field.
5484 If VALUE_MODE is VOIDmode, return nothing in particular.
5485 UNSIGNEDP is not used in this case.
5487 Otherwise, return an rtx for the value stored. This rtx
5488 has mode VALUE_MODE if that is convenient to do.
5489 In this case, UNSIGNEDP must be nonzero if the value is an unsigned type.
5491 TYPE is the type of the underlying object,
5493 ALIAS_SET is the alias set for the destination. This value will
5494 (in general) be different from that for TARGET, since TARGET is a
5495 reference to the containing structure. */
5498 store_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, value_mode, unsignedp, type,
5501 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize;
5502 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos;
5503 enum machine_mode mode;
5505 enum machine_mode value_mode;
5510 HOST_WIDE_INT width_mask = 0;
5512 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK)
5515 /* If we have nothing to store, do nothing unless the expression has
5518 return expand_expr (exp, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
5519 else if (bitsize >= 0 && bitsize < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
5520 width_mask = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bitsize) - 1;
5522 /* If we are storing into an unaligned field of an aligned union that is
5523 in a register, we may have the mode of TARGET being an integer mode but
5524 MODE == BLKmode. In that case, get an aligned object whose size and
5525 alignment are the same as TARGET and store TARGET into it (we can avoid
5526 the store if the field being stored is the entire width of TARGET). Then
5527 call ourselves recursively to store the field into a BLKmode version of
5528 that object. Finally, load from the object into TARGET. This is not
5529 very efficient in general, but should only be slightly more expensive
5530 than the otherwise-required unaligned accesses. Perhaps this can be
5531 cleaned up later. It's tempting to make OBJECT readonly, but it's set
5532 twice, once with emit_move_insn and once via store_field. */
5535 && (GET_CODE (target) == REG || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG))
5537 rtx object = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1);
5538 rtx blk_object = adjust_address (object, BLKmode, 0);
5540 if (bitsize != (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (target)))
5541 emit_move_insn (object, target);
5543 store_field (blk_object, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, VOIDmode, 0, type,
5546 emit_move_insn (target, object);
5548 /* We want to return the BLKmode version of the data. */
5552 if (GET_CODE (target) == CONCAT)
5554 /* We're storing into a struct containing a single __complex. */
5558 return store_expr (exp, target, 0);
5561 /* If the structure is in a register or if the component
5562 is a bit field, we cannot use addressing to access it.
5563 Use bit-field techniques or SUBREG to store in it. */
5565 if (mode == VOIDmode
5566 || (mode != BLKmode && ! direct_store[(int) mode]
5567 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
5568 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
5569 || GET_CODE (target) == REG
5570 || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG
5571 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to store as an ordinary memref,
5572 store it as a bit field. */
5574 && ((SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode, MEM_ALIGN (target))
5575 && (MEM_ALIGN (target) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)))
5576 || bitpos % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)))
5577 /* If the RHS and field are a constant size and the size of the
5578 RHS isn't the same size as the bitfield, we must use bitfield
5581 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) == INTEGER_CST
5582 && compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)), bitsize) != 0))
5584 rtx temp = expand_expr (exp, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
5586 /* If BITSIZE is narrower than the size of the type of EXP
5587 we will be narrowing TEMP. Normally, what's wanted are the
5588 low-order bits. However, if EXP's type is a record and this is
5589 big-endian machine, we want the upper BITSIZE bits. */
5590 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (temp)) == MODE_INT
5591 && bitsize < (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp))
5592 && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == RECORD_TYPE)
5593 temp = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (temp), temp,
5594 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp))
5598 /* Unless MODE is VOIDmode or BLKmode, convert TEMP to
5600 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode
5601 && mode != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
5602 temp = convert_modes (mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)), temp, 1);
5604 /* If the modes of TARGET and TEMP are both BLKmode, both
5605 must be in memory and BITPOS must be aligned on a byte
5606 boundary. If so, we simply do a block copy. */
5607 if (GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode && GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode)
5609 if (GET_CODE (target) != MEM || GET_CODE (temp) != MEM
5610 || bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT != 0)
5613 target = adjust_address (target, VOIDmode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
5614 emit_block_move (target, temp,
5615 GEN_INT ((bitsize + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1)
5619 return value_mode == VOIDmode ? const0_rtx : target;
5622 /* Store the value in the bitfield. */
5623 store_bit_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, temp,
5624 int_size_in_bytes (type));
5626 if (value_mode != VOIDmode)
5628 /* The caller wants an rtx for the value.
5629 If possible, avoid refetching from the bitfield itself. */
5631 && ! (GET_CODE (target) == MEM && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target)))
5634 enum machine_mode tmode;
5636 tmode = GET_MODE (temp);
5637 if (tmode == VOIDmode)
5641 return expand_and (tmode, temp,
5642 gen_int_mode (width_mask, tmode),
5645 count = build_int_2 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (tmode) - bitsize, 0);
5646 temp = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, tmode, temp, count, 0, 0);
5647 return expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, tmode, temp, count, 0, 0);
5650 return extract_bit_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, unsignedp,
5651 NULL_RTX, value_mode, VOIDmode,
5652 int_size_in_bytes (type));
5658 rtx addr = XEXP (target, 0);
5659 rtx to_rtx = target;
5661 /* If a value is wanted, it must be the lhs;
5662 so make the address stable for multiple use. */
5664 if (value_mode != VOIDmode && GET_CODE (addr) != REG
5665 && ! CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr)
5666 /* A frame-pointer reference is already stable. */
5667 && ! (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
5668 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
5669 && (XEXP (addr, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx
5670 || XEXP (addr, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx)))
5671 to_rtx = replace_equiv_address (to_rtx, copy_to_reg (addr));
5673 /* Now build a reference to just the desired component. */
5675 to_rtx = adjust_address (target, mode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
5677 if (to_rtx == target)
5678 to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx);
5680 MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (to_rtx, 1);
5681 if (!MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) && MEM_ALIAS_SET (to_rtx) != 0)
5682 set_mem_alias_set (to_rtx, alias_set);
5684 return store_expr (exp, to_rtx, value_mode != VOIDmode);
5688 /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF, a BIT_FIELD_REF,
5689 an ARRAY_REF, or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF, look for nested operations of these
5690 codes and find the ultimate containing object, which we return.
5692 We set *PBITSIZE to the size in bits that we want, *PBITPOS to the
5693 bit position, and *PUNSIGNEDP to the signedness of the field.
5694 If the position of the field is variable, we store a tree
5695 giving the variable offset (in units) in *POFFSET.
5696 This offset is in addition to the bit position.
5697 If the position is not variable, we store 0 in *POFFSET.
5699 If any of the extraction expressions is volatile,
5700 we store 1 in *PVOLATILEP. Otherwise we don't change that.
5702 If the field is a bit-field, *PMODE is set to VOIDmode. Otherwise, it
5703 is a mode that can be used to access the field. In that case, *PBITSIZE
5706 If the field describes a variable-sized object, *PMODE is set to
5707 VOIDmode and *PBITSIZE is set to -1. An access cannot be made in
5708 this case, but the address of the object can be found. */
5711 get_inner_reference (exp, pbitsize, pbitpos, poffset, pmode,
5712 punsignedp, pvolatilep)
5714 HOST_WIDE_INT *pbitsize;
5715 HOST_WIDE_INT *pbitpos;
5717 enum machine_mode *pmode;
5722 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode;
5723 tree offset = size_zero_node;
5724 tree bit_offset = bitsize_zero_node;
5725 tree placeholder_ptr = 0;
5728 /* First get the mode, signedness, and size. We do this from just the
5729 outermost expression. */
5730 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPONENT_REF)
5732 size_tree = DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
5733 if (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
5734 mode = DECL_MODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
5736 *punsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
5738 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == BIT_FIELD_REF)
5740 size_tree = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5741 *punsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (exp);
5745 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5746 *punsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5748 if (mode == BLKmode)
5749 size_tree = TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5751 *pbitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
5756 if (! host_integerp (size_tree, 1))
5757 mode = BLKmode, *pbitsize = -1;
5759 *pbitsize = tree_low_cst (size_tree, 1);
5762 /* Compute cumulative bit-offset for nested component-refs and array-refs,
5763 and find the ultimate containing object. */
5766 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == BIT_FIELD_REF)
5767 bit_offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, bit_offset, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2));
5768 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPONENT_REF)
5770 tree field = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5771 tree this_offset = DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field);
5773 /* If this field hasn't been filled in yet, don't go
5774 past it. This should only happen when folding expressions
5775 made during type construction. */
5776 if (this_offset == 0)
5778 else if (! TREE_CONSTANT (this_offset)
5779 && contains_placeholder_p (this_offset))
5780 this_offset = build (WITH_RECORD_EXPR, sizetype, this_offset, exp);
5782 offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, offset, this_offset);
5783 bit_offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, bit_offset,
5784 DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field));
5786 /* ??? Right now we don't do anything with DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN. */
5789 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ARRAY_REF
5790 || TREE_CODE (exp) == ARRAY_RANGE_REF)
5792 tree index = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5793 tree array = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
5794 tree domain = TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (array));
5795 tree low_bound = (domain ? TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain) : 0);
5796 tree unit_size = TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (array)));
5798 /* We assume all arrays have sizes that are a multiple of a byte.
5799 First subtract the lower bound, if any, in the type of the
5800 index, then convert to sizetype and multiply by the size of the
5802 if (low_bound != 0 && ! integer_zerop (low_bound))
5803 index = fold (build (MINUS_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (index),
5806 /* If the index has a self-referential type, pass it to a
5807 WITH_RECORD_EXPR; if the component size is, pass our
5808 component to one. */
5809 if (! TREE_CONSTANT (index)
5810 && contains_placeholder_p (index))
5811 index = build (WITH_RECORD_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (index), index, exp);
5812 if (! TREE_CONSTANT (unit_size)
5813 && contains_placeholder_p (unit_size))
5814 unit_size = build (WITH_RECORD_EXPR, sizetype, unit_size, array);
5816 offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, offset,
5817 size_binop (MULT_EXPR,
5818 convert (sizetype, index),
5822 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == PLACEHOLDER_EXPR)
5824 tree new = find_placeholder (exp, &placeholder_ptr);
5826 /* If we couldn't find the replacement, return the PLACEHOLDER_EXPR.
5827 We might have been called from tree optimization where we
5828 haven't set up an object yet. */
5836 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) != NON_LVALUE_EXPR
5837 && TREE_CODE (exp) != VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
5838 && ! ((TREE_CODE (exp) == NOP_EXPR
5839 || TREE_CODE (exp) == CONVERT_EXPR)
5840 && (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp))
5841 == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))))
5844 /* If any reference in the chain is volatile, the effect is volatile. */
5845 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp))
5848 exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
5851 /* If OFFSET is constant, see if we can return the whole thing as a
5852 constant bit position. Otherwise, split it up. */
5853 if (host_integerp (offset, 0)
5854 && 0 != (tem = size_binop (MULT_EXPR, convert (bitsizetype, offset),
5856 && 0 != (tem = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, tem, bit_offset))
5857 && host_integerp (tem, 0))
5858 *pbitpos = tree_low_cst (tem, 0), *poffset = 0;
5860 *pbitpos = tree_low_cst (bit_offset, 0), *poffset = offset;
5866 /* Return 1 if T is an expression that get_inner_reference handles. */
5869 handled_component_p (t)
5872 switch (TREE_CODE (t))
5877 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF:
5878 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR:
5879 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR:
5884 return (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (t))
5885 == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (t, 0))));
5892 /* Given an rtx VALUE that may contain additions and multiplications, return
5893 an equivalent value that just refers to a register, memory, or constant.
5894 This is done by generating instructions to perform the arithmetic and
5895 returning a pseudo-register containing the value.
5897 The returned value may be a REG, SUBREG, MEM or constant. */
5900 force_operand (value, target)
5904 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
5905 rtx subtarget = get_subtarget (target);
5906 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (value);
5908 /* Check for a PIC address load. */
5909 if ((code == PLUS || code == MINUS)
5910 && XEXP (value, 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx
5911 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF
5912 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == LABEL_REF
5913 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == CONST))
5916 subtarget = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value));
5917 emit_move_insn (subtarget, value);
5921 if (code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
5924 target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value));
5925 convert_move (target, force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), NULL),
5926 code == ZERO_EXTEND);
5930 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '2' || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
5932 op2 = XEXP (value, 1);
5933 if (!CONSTANT_P (op2) && !(GET_CODE (op2) == REG && op2 != subtarget))
5935 if (code == MINUS && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT)
5938 op2 = negate_rtx (GET_MODE (value), op2);
5941 /* Check for an addition with OP2 a constant integer and our first
5942 operand a PLUS of a virtual register and something else. In that
5943 case, we want to emit the sum of the virtual register and the
5944 constant first and then add the other value. This allows virtual
5945 register instantiation to simply modify the constant rather than
5946 creating another one around this addition. */
5947 if (code == PLUS && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
5948 && GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 0)) == PLUS
5949 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) == REG
5950 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
5951 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER)
5953 rtx temp = expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code,
5954 XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0), op2,
5955 subtarget, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
5956 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, temp,
5957 force_operand (XEXP (XEXP (value,
5959 target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
5962 op1 = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), subtarget);
5963 op2 = force_operand (op2, NULL_RTX);
5967 return expand_mult (GET_MODE (value), op1, op2, target, 1);
5969 if (!INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value)))
5970 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2,
5971 target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
5973 return expand_divmod (0,
5974 FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value))
5975 ? RDIV_EXPR : TRUNC_DIV_EXPR,
5976 GET_MODE (value), op1, op2, target, 0);
5979 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2,
5983 return expand_divmod (0, TRUNC_DIV_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2,
5987 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2,
5991 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2,
5992 target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
5995 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2,
5996 target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
5999 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '1')
6001 op1 = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), NULL_RTX);
6002 return expand_simple_unop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, target, 0);
6005 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
6006 /* On machines that have insn scheduling, we want all memory reference to be
6007 explicit, so we need to deal with such paradoxical SUBREGs. */
6008 if (GET_CODE (value) == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (value)) == MEM
6009 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (value))
6010 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)))))
6012 = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value),
6013 force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)),
6014 force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value),
6016 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)),
6017 SUBREG_BYTE (value));
6023 /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff there is no way that
6024 EXP can reference X, which is being modified. TOP_P is nonzero if this
6025 call is going to be used to determine whether we need a temporary
6026 for EXP, as opposed to a recursive call to this function.
6028 It is always safe for this routine to return zero since it merely
6029 searches for optimization opportunities. */
6032 safe_from_p (x, exp, top_p)
6039 static tree save_expr_list;
6042 /* If EXP has varying size, we MUST use a target since we currently
6043 have no way of allocating temporaries of variable size
6044 (except for arrays that have TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE set).
6045 So we assume here that something at a higher level has prevented a
6046 clash. This is somewhat bogus, but the best we can do. Only
6047 do this when X is BLKmode and when we are at the top level. */
6048 || (top_p && TREE_TYPE (exp) != 0 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp))
6049 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) != INTEGER_CST
6050 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) != ARRAY_TYPE
6051 || TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == NULL_TREE
6052 || TREE_CODE (TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
6054 && GET_MODE (x) == BLKmode)
6055 /* If X is in the outgoing argument area, it is always safe. */
6056 || (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
6057 && (XEXP (x, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
6058 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
6059 && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx))))
6062 /* If this is a subreg of a hard register, declare it unsafe, otherwise,
6063 find the underlying pseudo. */
6064 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
6067 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6071 /* A SAVE_EXPR might appear many times in the expression passed to the
6072 top-level safe_from_p call, and if it has a complex subexpression,
6073 examining it multiple times could result in a combinatorial explosion.
6074 E.g. on an Alpha running at least 200MHz, a Fortran test case compiled
6075 with optimization took about 28 minutes to compile -- even though it was
6076 only a few lines long. So we mark each SAVE_EXPR we see with TREE_PRIVATE
6077 and turn that off when we are done. We keep a list of the SAVE_EXPRs
6078 we have processed. Note that the only test of top_p was above. */
6087 rtn = safe_from_p (x, exp, 0);
6089 for (t = save_expr_list; t != 0; t = TREE_CHAIN (t))
6090 TREE_PRIVATE (TREE_PURPOSE (t)) = 0;
6095 /* Now look at our tree code and possibly recurse. */
6096 switch (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp)))
6099 exp_rtl = DECL_RTL_IF_SET (exp);
6106 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == TREE_LIST)
6110 if (TREE_VALUE (exp) && !safe_from_p (x, TREE_VALUE (exp), 0))
6112 exp = TREE_CHAIN (exp);
6115 if (TREE_CODE (exp) != TREE_LIST)
6116 return safe_from_p (x, exp, 0);
6119 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK)
6120 return 1; /* An already-visited SAVE_EXPR? */
6126 if (!safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0))
6131 return safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
6135 /* Now do code-specific tests. EXP_RTL is set to any rtx we find in
6136 the expression. If it is set, we conflict iff we are that rtx or
6137 both are in memory. Otherwise, we check all operands of the
6138 expression recursively. */
6140 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
6143 /* If the operand is static or we are static, we can't conflict.
6144 Likewise if we don't conflict with the operand at all. */
6145 if (staticp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
6146 || TREE_STATIC (exp)
6147 || safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))
6150 /* Otherwise, the only way this can conflict is if we are taking
6151 the address of a DECL a that address if part of X, which is
6153 exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
6156 if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (exp)
6157 || GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) != MEM)
6160 exp_rtl = XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0);
6165 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
6166 && alias_sets_conflict_p (MEM_ALIAS_SET (x),
6167 get_alias_set (exp)))
6172 /* Assume that the call will clobber all hard registers and
6174 if ((GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6175 || GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
6180 /* If a sequence exists, we would have to scan every instruction
6181 in the sequence to see if it was safe. This is probably not
6183 if (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp))
6186 exp_rtl = RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
6189 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
6190 exp_rtl = WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR_RTL (exp);
6193 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR:
6194 return safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
6197 exp_rtl = SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
6201 /* If we've already scanned this, don't do it again. Otherwise,
6202 show we've scanned it and record for clearing the flag if we're
6204 if (TREE_PRIVATE (exp))
6207 TREE_PRIVATE (exp) = 1;
6208 if (! safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))
6210 TREE_PRIVATE (exp) = 0;
6214 save_expr_list = tree_cons (exp, NULL_TREE, save_expr_list);
6218 /* The only operand we look at is operand 1. The rest aren't
6219 part of the expression. */
6220 return safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0);
6222 case METHOD_CALL_EXPR:
6223 /* This takes an rtx argument, but shouldn't appear here. */
6230 /* If we have an rtx, we do not need to scan our operands. */
6234 nops = first_rtl_op (TREE_CODE (exp));
6235 for (i = 0; i < nops; i++)
6236 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i) != 0
6237 && ! safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, i), 0))
6240 /* If this is a language-specific tree code, it may require
6241 special handling. */
6242 if ((unsigned int) TREE_CODE (exp)
6243 >= (unsigned int) LAST_AND_UNUSED_TREE_CODE
6244 && !(*lang_hooks.safe_from_p) (x, exp))
6248 /* If we have an rtl, find any enclosed object. Then see if we conflict
6252 if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == SUBREG)
6254 exp_rtl = SUBREG_REG (exp_rtl);
6255 if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == REG
6256 && REGNO (exp_rtl) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6260 /* If the rtl is X, then it is not safe. Otherwise, it is unless both
6261 are memory and they conflict. */
6262 return ! (rtx_equal_p (x, exp_rtl)
6263 || (GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == MEM
6264 && true_dependence (exp_rtl, VOIDmode, x,
6265 rtx_addr_varies_p)));
6268 /* If we reach here, it is safe. */
6272 /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return rtx if EXP is a
6273 variable or parameter; else return 0. */
6280 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
6284 return DECL_RTL (exp);
6290 #ifdef MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
6293 check_max_integer_computation_mode (exp)
6296 enum tree_code code;
6297 enum machine_mode mode;
6299 /* Strip any NOPs that don't change the mode. */
6301 code = TREE_CODE (exp);
6303 /* We must allow conversions of constants to MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE. */
6304 if (code == NOP_EXPR
6305 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST)
6308 /* First check the type of the overall operation. We need only look at
6309 unary, binary and relational operations. */
6310 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == '1'
6311 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == '2'
6312 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == '<')
6314 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
6315 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6316 && mode > MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE)
6317 internal_error ("unsupported wide integer operation");
6320 /* Check operand of a unary op. */
6321 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == '1')
6323 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
6324 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6325 && mode > MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE)
6326 internal_error ("unsupported wide integer operation");
6329 /* Check operands of a binary/comparison op. */
6330 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == '2' || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == '<')
6332 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
6333 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6334 && mode > MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE)
6335 internal_error ("unsupported wide integer operation");
6337 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)));
6338 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6339 && mode > MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE)
6340 internal_error ("unsupported wide integer operation");
6345 /* Return the highest power of two that EXP is known to be a multiple of.
6346 This is used in updating alignment of MEMs in array references. */
6348 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
6349 highest_pow2_factor (exp)
6352 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT c0, c1;
6354 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
6357 /* We can find the lowest bit that's a one. If the low
6358 HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT bits are zero, return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT.
6359 We need to handle this case since we can find it in a COND_EXPR,
6360 a MIN_EXPR, or a MAX_EXPR. If the constant overlows, we have an
6361 erroneous program, so return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT to avoid any
6363 if (TREE_CONSTANT_OVERFLOW (exp))
6364 return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT;
6367 /* Note: tree_low_cst is intentionally not used here,
6368 we don't care about the upper bits. */
6369 c0 = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp);
6371 return c0 ? c0 : BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT;
6375 case PLUS_EXPR: case MINUS_EXPR: case MIN_EXPR: case MAX_EXPR:
6376 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6377 c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6378 return MIN (c0, c1);
6381 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6382 c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6385 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR: case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR: case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR:
6387 if (integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
6388 && host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
6390 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6391 c1 = tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1);
6392 return MAX (1, c0 / c1);
6396 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR: case NOP_EXPR: case CONVERT_EXPR:
6397 case SAVE_EXPR: case WITH_RECORD_EXPR:
6398 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6401 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6404 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6405 c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2));
6406 return MIN (c0, c1);
6415 /* Similar, except that it is known that the expression must be a multiple
6416 of the alignment of TYPE. */
6418 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
6419 highest_pow2_factor_for_type (type, exp)
6423 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT type_align, factor;
6425 factor = highest_pow2_factor (exp);
6426 type_align = TYPE_ALIGN (type) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
6427 return MAX (factor, type_align);
6430 /* Return an object on the placeholder list that matches EXP, a
6431 PLACEHOLDER_EXPR. An object "matches" if it is of the type of the
6432 PLACEHOLDER_EXPR or a pointer type to it. For further information, see
6433 tree.def. If no such object is found, return 0. If PLIST is nonzero, it
6434 is a location which initially points to a starting location in the
6435 placeholder list (zero means start of the list) and where a pointer into
6436 the placeholder list at which the object is found is placed. */
6439 find_placeholder (exp, plist)
6443 tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp);
6444 tree placeholder_expr;
6446 for (placeholder_expr
6447 = plist && *plist ? TREE_CHAIN (*plist) : placeholder_list;
6448 placeholder_expr != 0;
6449 placeholder_expr = TREE_CHAIN (placeholder_expr))
6451 tree need_type = TYPE_MAIN_VARIANT (type);
6454 /* Find the outermost reference that is of the type we want. If none,
6455 see if any object has a type that is a pointer to the type we
6457 for (elt = TREE_PURPOSE (placeholder_expr); elt != 0;
6458 elt = ((TREE_CODE (elt) == COMPOUND_EXPR
6459 || TREE_CODE (elt) == COND_EXPR)
6460 ? TREE_OPERAND (elt, 1)
6461 : (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt)) == 'r'
6462 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt)) == '1'
6463 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt)) == '2'
6464 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt)) == 'e')
6465 ? TREE_OPERAND (elt, 0) : 0))
6466 if (TYPE_MAIN_VARIANT (TREE_TYPE (elt)) == need_type)
6469 *plist = placeholder_expr;
6473 for (elt = TREE_PURPOSE (placeholder_expr); elt != 0;
6475 = ((TREE_CODE (elt) == COMPOUND_EXPR
6476 || TREE_CODE (elt) == COND_EXPR)
6477 ? TREE_OPERAND (elt, 1)
6478 : (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt)) == 'r'
6479 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt)) == '1'
6480 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt)) == '2'
6481 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt)) == 'e')
6482 ? TREE_OPERAND (elt, 0) : 0))
6483 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (elt))
6484 && (TYPE_MAIN_VARIANT (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (elt)))
6488 *plist = placeholder_expr;
6489 return build1 (INDIRECT_REF, need_type, elt);
6496 /* expand_expr: generate code for computing expression EXP.
6497 An rtx for the computed value is returned. The value is never null.
6498 In the case of a void EXP, const0_rtx is returned.
6500 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero.
6501 TARGET is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
6502 the rtx returned may not be the same as TARGET.
6504 If TARGET is CONST0_RTX, it means that the value will be ignored.
6506 If TMODE is not VOIDmode, it suggests generating the
6507 result in mode TMODE. But this is done only when convenient.
6508 Otherwise, TMODE is ignored and the value generated in its natural mode.
6509 TMODE is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
6510 the rtx returned may not have mode TMODE.
6512 Note that TARGET may have neither TMODE nor MODE. In that case, it
6513 probably will not be used.
6515 If MODIFIER is EXPAND_SUM then when EXP is an addition
6516 we can return an rtx of the form (MULT (REG ...) (CONST_INT ...))
6517 or a nest of (PLUS ...) and (MINUS ...) where the terms are
6518 products as above, or REG or MEM, or constant.
6519 Ordinarily in such cases we would output mul or add instructions
6520 and then return a pseudo reg containing the sum.
6522 EXPAND_INITIALIZER is much like EXPAND_SUM except that
6523 it also marks a label as absolutely required (it can't be dead).
6524 It also makes a ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND instead of emitting extend insns.
6525 This is used for outputting expressions used in initializers.
6527 EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS says that it is okay to return a MEM
6528 with a constant address even if that address is not normally legitimate.
6529 EXPAND_INITIALIZER and EXPAND_SUM also have this effect.
6531 EXPAND_STACK_PARM is used when expanding to a TARGET on the stack for
6532 a call parameter. Such targets require special care as we haven't yet
6533 marked TARGET so that it's safe from being trashed by libcalls. We
6534 don't want to use TARGET for anything but the final result;
6535 Intermediate values must go elsewhere. Additionally, calls to
6536 emit_block_move will be flagged with BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM. */
6539 expand_expr (exp, target, tmode, modifier)
6542 enum machine_mode tmode;
6543 enum expand_modifier modifier;
6546 tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp);
6547 int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (type);
6548 enum machine_mode mode;
6549 enum tree_code code = TREE_CODE (exp);
6551 rtx subtarget, original_target;
6555 /* Handle ERROR_MARK before anybody tries to access its type. */
6556 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK || TREE_CODE (type) == ERROR_MARK)
6558 op0 = CONST0_RTX (tmode);
6564 mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
6565 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
6566 subtarget = get_subtarget (target);
6567 original_target = target;
6568 ignore = (target == const0_rtx
6569 || ((code == NON_LVALUE_EXPR || code == NOP_EXPR
6570 || code == CONVERT_EXPR || code == REFERENCE_EXPR
6571 || code == COND_EXPR || code == VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR)
6572 && TREE_CODE (type) == VOID_TYPE));
6574 /* If we are going to ignore this result, we need only do something
6575 if there is a side-effect somewhere in the expression. If there
6576 is, short-circuit the most common cases here. Note that we must
6577 not call expand_expr with anything but const0_rtx in case this
6578 is an initial expansion of a size that contains a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR. */
6582 if (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp))
6585 /* Ensure we reference a volatile object even if value is ignored, but
6586 don't do this if all we are doing is taking its address. */
6587 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp)
6588 && TREE_CODE (exp) != FUNCTION_DECL
6589 && mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode
6590 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS)
6592 temp = expand_expr (exp, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, modifier);
6593 if (GET_CODE (temp) == MEM)
6594 temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
6598 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == '1' || code == COMPONENT_REF
6599 || code == INDIRECT_REF || code == BUFFER_REF)
6600 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode,
6603 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == '2' || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == '<'
6604 || code == ARRAY_REF || code == ARRAY_RANGE_REF)
6606 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
6607 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
6610 else if ((code == TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR || code == TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR)
6611 && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
6612 /* If the second operand has no side effects, just evaluate
6614 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode,
6616 else if (code == BIT_FIELD_REF)
6618 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
6619 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
6620 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
6627 #ifdef MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
6628 /* Only check stuff here if the mode we want is different from the mode
6629 of the expression; if it's the same, check_max_integer_computation_mode
6630 will handle it. Do we really need to check this stuff at all? */
6633 && GET_MODE (target) != mode
6634 && TREE_CODE (exp) != INTEGER_CST
6635 && TREE_CODE (exp) != PARM_DECL
6636 && TREE_CODE (exp) != ARRAY_REF
6637 && TREE_CODE (exp) != ARRAY_RANGE_REF
6638 && TREE_CODE (exp) != COMPONENT_REF
6639 && TREE_CODE (exp) != BIT_FIELD_REF
6640 && TREE_CODE (exp) != INDIRECT_REF
6641 && TREE_CODE (exp) != CALL_EXPR
6642 && TREE_CODE (exp) != VAR_DECL
6643 && TREE_CODE (exp) != RTL_EXPR)
6645 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (target);
6647 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6648 && mode > MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE)
6649 internal_error ("unsupported wide integer operation");
6653 && TREE_CODE (exp) != INTEGER_CST
6654 && TREE_CODE (exp) != PARM_DECL
6655 && TREE_CODE (exp) != ARRAY_REF
6656 && TREE_CODE (exp) != ARRAY_RANGE_REF
6657 && TREE_CODE (exp) != COMPONENT_REF
6658 && TREE_CODE (exp) != BIT_FIELD_REF
6659 && TREE_CODE (exp) != INDIRECT_REF
6660 && TREE_CODE (exp) != VAR_DECL
6661 && TREE_CODE (exp) != CALL_EXPR
6662 && TREE_CODE (exp) != RTL_EXPR
6663 && GET_MODE_CLASS (tmode) == MODE_INT
6664 && tmode > MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE)
6665 internal_error ("unsupported wide integer operation");
6667 check_max_integer_computation_mode (exp);
6670 /* If will do cse, generate all results into pseudo registers
6671 since 1) that allows cse to find more things
6672 and 2) otherwise cse could produce an insn the machine
6673 cannot support. An exception is a CONSTRUCTOR into a multi-word
6674 MEM: that's much more likely to be most efficient into the MEM.
6675 Another is a CALL_EXPR which must return in memory. */
6677 if (! cse_not_expected && mode != BLKmode && target
6678 && (GET_CODE (target) != REG || REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6679 && ! (code == CONSTRUCTOR && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
6680 && ! (code == CALL_EXPR && aggregate_value_p (exp)))
6687 tree function = decl_function_context (exp);
6688 /* Handle using a label in a containing function. */
6689 if (function != current_function_decl
6690 && function != inline_function_decl && function != 0)
6692 struct function *p = find_function_data (function);
6693 p->expr->x_forced_labels
6694 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, label_rtx (exp),
6695 p->expr->x_forced_labels);
6699 if (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
6700 forced_labels = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
6705 temp = gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE,
6706 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode, label_rtx (exp)));
6707 if (function != current_function_decl
6708 && function != inline_function_decl && function != 0)
6709 LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (XEXP (temp, 0)) = 1;
6714 if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (exp))
6716 error_with_decl (exp, "prior parameter's size depends on `%s'");
6717 return CONST0_RTX (mode);
6720 /* ... fall through ... */
6723 /* If a static var's type was incomplete when the decl was written,
6724 but the type is complete now, lay out the decl now. */
6725 if (DECL_SIZE (exp) == 0
6726 && COMPLETE_OR_UNBOUND_ARRAY_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp))
6727 && (TREE_STATIC (exp) || DECL_EXTERNAL (exp)))
6728 layout_decl (exp, 0);
6730 /* ... fall through ... */
6734 if (DECL_RTL (exp) == 0)
6737 /* Ensure variable marked as used even if it doesn't go through
6738 a parser. If it hasn't be used yet, write out an external
6740 if (! TREE_USED (exp))
6742 assemble_external (exp);
6743 TREE_USED (exp) = 1;
6746 /* Show we haven't gotten RTL for this yet. */
6749 /* Handle variables inherited from containing functions. */
6750 context = decl_function_context (exp);
6752 /* We treat inline_function_decl as an alias for the current function
6753 because that is the inline function whose vars, types, etc.
6754 are being merged into the current function.
6755 See expand_inline_function. */
6757 if (context != 0 && context != current_function_decl
6758 && context != inline_function_decl
6759 /* If var is static, we don't need a static chain to access it. */
6760 && ! (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) == MEM
6761 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0))))
6765 /* Mark as non-local and addressable. */
6766 DECL_NONLOCAL (exp) = 1;
6767 if (DECL_NO_STATIC_CHAIN (current_function_decl))
6769 (*lang_hooks.mark_addressable) (exp);
6770 if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) != MEM)
6772 addr = XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0);
6773 if (GET_CODE (addr) == MEM)
6775 = replace_equiv_address (addr,
6776 fix_lexical_addr (XEXP (addr, 0), exp));
6778 addr = fix_lexical_addr (addr, exp);
6780 temp = replace_equiv_address (DECL_RTL (exp), addr);
6783 /* This is the case of an array whose size is to be determined
6784 from its initializer, while the initializer is still being parsed.
6787 else if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) == MEM
6788 && GET_CODE (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0)) == REG)
6789 temp = validize_mem (DECL_RTL (exp));
6791 /* If DECL_RTL is memory, we are in the normal case and either
6792 the address is not valid or it is not a register and -fforce-addr
6793 is specified, get the address into a register. */
6795 else if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) == MEM
6796 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
6797 && modifier != EXPAND_SUM
6798 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6799 && (! memory_address_p (DECL_MODE (exp),
6800 XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0))
6802 && GET_CODE (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0)) != REG)))
6803 temp = replace_equiv_address (DECL_RTL (exp),
6804 copy_rtx (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0)));
6806 /* If we got something, return it. But first, set the alignment
6807 if the address is a register. */
6810 if (GET_CODE (temp) == MEM && GET_CODE (XEXP (temp, 0)) == REG)
6811 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (temp, 0), DECL_ALIGN (exp));
6816 /* If the mode of DECL_RTL does not match that of the decl, it
6817 must be a promoted value. We return a SUBREG of the wanted mode,
6818 but mark it so that we know that it was already extended. */
6820 if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) == REG
6821 && GET_MODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) != DECL_MODE (exp))
6823 /* Get the signedness used for this variable. Ensure we get the
6824 same mode we got when the variable was declared. */
6825 if (GET_MODE (DECL_RTL (exp))
6826 != promote_mode (type, DECL_MODE (exp), &unsignedp,
6827 (TREE_CODE (exp) == RESULT_DECL ? 1 : 0)))
6830 temp = gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode, DECL_RTL (exp));
6831 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp) = 1;
6832 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_SET (temp, unsignedp);
6836 return DECL_RTL (exp);
6839 temp = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp),
6840 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (exp), mode);
6842 /* ??? If overflow is set, fold will have done an incomplete job,
6843 which can result in (plus xx (const_int 0)), which can get
6844 simplified by validate_replace_rtx during virtual register
6845 instantiation, which can result in unrecognizable insns.
6846 Avoid this by forcing all overflows into registers. */
6847 if (TREE_CONSTANT_OVERFLOW (exp)
6848 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
6849 temp = force_reg (mode, temp);
6854 return const_vector_from_tree (exp);
6857 return expand_expr (DECL_INITIAL (exp), target, VOIDmode, modifier);
6860 /* If optimized, generate immediate CONST_DOUBLE
6861 which will be turned into memory by reload if necessary.
6863 We used to force a register so that loop.c could see it. But
6864 this does not allow gen_* patterns to perform optimizations with
6865 the constants. It also produces two insns in cases like "x = 1.0;".
6866 On most machines, floating-point constants are not permitted in
6867 many insns, so we'd end up copying it to a register in any case.
6869 Now, we do the copying in expand_binop, if appropriate. */
6870 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (exp),
6871 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
6875 if (! TREE_CST_RTL (exp))
6876 output_constant_def (exp, 1);
6878 /* TREE_CST_RTL probably contains a constant address.
6879 On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid,
6880 make some insns to get that address into a register. */
6881 if (GET_CODE (TREE_CST_RTL (exp)) == MEM
6882 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
6883 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6884 && modifier != EXPAND_SUM
6885 && (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (TREE_CST_RTL (exp), 0))
6887 && GET_CODE (XEXP (TREE_CST_RTL (exp), 0)) != REG)))
6888 return replace_equiv_address (TREE_CST_RTL (exp),
6889 copy_rtx (XEXP (TREE_CST_RTL (exp), 0)));
6890 return TREE_CST_RTL (exp);
6892 case EXPR_WITH_FILE_LOCATION:
6895 const char *saved_input_filename = input_filename;
6896 int saved_lineno = lineno;
6897 input_filename = EXPR_WFL_FILENAME (exp);
6898 lineno = EXPR_WFL_LINENO (exp);
6899 if (EXPR_WFL_EMIT_LINE_NOTE (exp))
6900 emit_line_note (input_filename, lineno);
6901 /* Possibly avoid switching back and forth here. */
6902 to_return = expand_expr (EXPR_WFL_NODE (exp), target, tmode, modifier);
6903 input_filename = saved_input_filename;
6904 lineno = saved_lineno;
6909 context = decl_function_context (exp);
6911 /* If this SAVE_EXPR was at global context, assume we are an
6912 initialization function and move it into our context. */
6914 SAVE_EXPR_CONTEXT (exp) = current_function_decl;
6916 /* We treat inline_function_decl as an alias for the current function
6917 because that is the inline function whose vars, types, etc.
6918 are being merged into the current function.
6919 See expand_inline_function. */
6920 if (context == current_function_decl || context == inline_function_decl)
6923 /* If this is non-local, handle it. */
6926 /* The following call just exists to abort if the context is
6927 not of a containing function. */
6928 find_function_data (context);
6930 temp = SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
6931 if (temp && GET_CODE (temp) == REG)
6933 put_var_into_stack (exp, /*rescan=*/true);
6934 temp = SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
6936 if (temp == 0 || GET_CODE (temp) != MEM)
6939 replace_equiv_address (temp,
6940 fix_lexical_addr (XEXP (temp, 0), exp));
6942 if (SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp) == 0)
6944 if (mode == VOIDmode)
6947 temp = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type,
6949 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST)),
6952 SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp) = temp;
6953 if (!optimize && GET_CODE (temp) == REG)
6954 save_expr_regs = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, temp,
6957 /* If the mode of TEMP does not match that of the expression, it
6958 must be a promoted value. We pass store_expr a SUBREG of the
6959 wanted mode but mark it so that we know that it was already
6962 if (GET_CODE (temp) == REG && GET_MODE (temp) != mode)
6964 temp = gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode, SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp));
6965 promote_mode (type, mode, &unsignedp, 0);
6966 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp) = 1;
6967 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_SET (temp, unsignedp);
6970 if (temp == const0_rtx)
6971 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
6973 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), temp,
6974 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
6976 TREE_USED (exp) = 1;
6979 /* If the mode of SAVE_EXPR_RTL does not match that of the expression, it
6980 must be a promoted value. We return a SUBREG of the wanted mode,
6981 but mark it so that we know that it was already extended. */
6983 if (GET_CODE (SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp)) == REG
6984 && GET_MODE (SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp)) != mode)
6986 /* Compute the signedness and make the proper SUBREG. */
6987 promote_mode (type, mode, &unsignedp, 0);
6988 temp = gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode, SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp));
6989 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp) = 1;
6990 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_SET (temp, unsignedp);
6994 return SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
6999 temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode, modifier);
7000 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)
7001 = (*lang_hooks.unsave_expr_now) (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7005 case PLACEHOLDER_EXPR:
7007 tree old_list = placeholder_list;
7008 tree placeholder_expr = 0;
7010 exp = find_placeholder (exp, &placeholder_expr);
7014 placeholder_list = TREE_CHAIN (placeholder_expr);
7015 temp = expand_expr (exp, original_target, tmode, modifier);
7016 placeholder_list = old_list;
7020 case WITH_RECORD_EXPR:
7021 /* Put the object on the placeholder list, expand our first operand,
7022 and pop the list. */
7023 placeholder_list = tree_cons (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_TREE,
7025 target = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), original_target, tmode,
7027 placeholder_list = TREE_CHAIN (placeholder_list);
7031 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == LABEL_DECL)
7032 expand_goto (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7034 expand_computed_goto (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7038 expand_exit_loop_if_false (NULL,
7039 invert_truthvalue (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
7042 case LABELED_BLOCK_EXPR:
7043 if (LABELED_BLOCK_BODY (exp))
7044 expand_expr_stmt_value (LABELED_BLOCK_BODY (exp), 0, 1);
7045 /* Should perhaps use expand_label, but this is simpler and safer. */
7046 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
7047 emit_label (label_rtx (LABELED_BLOCK_LABEL (exp)));
7050 case EXIT_BLOCK_EXPR:
7051 if (EXIT_BLOCK_RETURN (exp))
7052 sorry ("returned value in block_exit_expr");
7053 expand_goto (LABELED_BLOCK_LABEL (EXIT_BLOCK_LABELED_BLOCK (exp)));
7058 expand_start_loop (1);
7059 expand_expr_stmt_value (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, 1);
7067 tree vars = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
7069 /* Need to open a binding contour here because
7070 if there are any cleanups they must be contained here. */
7071 expand_start_bindings (2);
7073 /* Mark the corresponding BLOCK for output in its proper place. */
7074 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2) != 0
7075 && ! TREE_USED (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)))
7076 (*lang_hooks.decls.insert_block) (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2));
7078 /* If VARS have not yet been expanded, expand them now. */
7081 if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (vars))
7083 expand_decl_init (vars);
7084 vars = TREE_CHAIN (vars);
7087 temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, tmode, modifier);
7089 expand_end_bindings (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, 0);
7095 if (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp))
7097 if (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp) == const0_rtx)
7099 emit_insn (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp));
7100 RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp) = const0_rtx;
7102 preserve_rtl_expr_result (RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp));
7103 free_temps_for_rtl_expr (exp);
7104 return RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
7107 /* If we don't need the result, just ensure we evaluate any
7113 for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp); elt; elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
7114 expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (elt), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
7119 /* All elts simple constants => refer to a constant in memory. But
7120 if this is a non-BLKmode mode, let it store a field at a time
7121 since that should make a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE when we
7122 fold. Likewise, if we have a target we can use, it is best to
7123 store directly into the target unless the type is large enough
7124 that memcpy will be used. If we are making an initializer and
7125 all operands are constant, put it in memory as well.
7127 FIXME: Avoid trying to fill vector constructors piece-meal.
7128 Output them with output_constant_def below unless we're sure
7129 they're zeros. This should go away when vector initializers
7130 are treated like VECTOR_CST instead of arrays.
7132 else if ((TREE_STATIC (exp)
7133 && ((mode == BLKmode
7134 && ! (target != 0 && safe_from_p (target, exp, 1)))
7135 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp)
7136 || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type), 1)
7137 && (! MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
7138 (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type), 1),
7140 && ((TREE_CODE (type) == VECTOR_TYPE
7141 && !is_zeros_p (exp))
7142 || ! mostly_zeros_p (exp)))))
7143 || (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER && TREE_CONSTANT (exp)))
7145 rtx constructor = output_constant_def (exp, 1);
7147 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7148 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7149 && modifier != EXPAND_SUM)
7150 constructor = validize_mem (constructor);
7156 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous
7157 locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
7158 if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, exp, 1)
7159 || GET_CODE (target) == PARALLEL
7160 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
7162 = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type,
7164 | (TREE_READONLY (exp)
7165 * TYPE_QUAL_CONST))),
7166 0, TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp), 1);
7168 store_constructor (exp, target, 0, int_expr_size (exp));
7174 tree exp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
7176 tree string = string_constant (exp1, &index);
7178 /* Try to optimize reads from const strings. */
7180 && TREE_CODE (string) == STRING_CST
7181 && TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST
7182 && compare_tree_int (index, TREE_STRING_LENGTH (string)) < 0
7183 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
7184 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == 1
7185 && modifier != EXPAND_WRITE)
7186 return gen_int_mode (TREE_STRING_POINTER (string)
7187 [TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index)], mode);
7189 op0 = expand_expr (exp1, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
7190 op0 = memory_address (mode, op0);
7191 temp = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, op0);
7192 set_mem_attributes (temp, exp, 0);
7194 /* If we are writing to this object and its type is a record with
7195 readonly fields, we must mark it as readonly so it will
7196 conflict with readonly references to those fields. */
7197 if (modifier == EXPAND_WRITE && readonly_fields_p (type))
7198 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (temp) = 1;
7204 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) != ARRAY_TYPE)
7208 tree array = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
7209 tree domain = TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (array));
7210 tree low_bound = domain ? TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain) : integer_zero_node;
7211 tree index = convert (sizetype, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
7214 /* Optimize the special-case of a zero lower bound.
7216 We convert the low_bound to sizetype to avoid some problems
7217 with constant folding. (E.g. suppose the lower bound is 1,
7218 and its mode is QI. Without the conversion, (ARRAY
7219 +(INDEX-(unsigned char)1)) becomes ((ARRAY+(-(unsigned char)1))
7220 +INDEX), which becomes (ARRAY+255+INDEX). Oops!) */
7222 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound))
7223 index = size_diffop (index, convert (sizetype, low_bound));
7225 /* Fold an expression like: "foo"[2].
7226 This is not done in fold so it won't happen inside &.
7227 Don't fold if this is for wide characters since it's too
7228 difficult to do correctly and this is a very rare case. */
7230 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7231 && TREE_CODE (array) == STRING_CST
7232 && TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST
7233 && compare_tree_int (index, TREE_STRING_LENGTH (array)) < 0
7234 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
7235 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == 1)
7236 return gen_int_mode (TREE_STRING_POINTER (array)
7237 [TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index)], mode);
7239 /* If this is a constant index into a constant array,
7240 just get the value from the array. Handle both the cases when
7241 we have an explicit constructor and when our operand is a variable
7242 that was declared const. */
7244 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7245 && TREE_CODE (array) == CONSTRUCTOR && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array)
7246 && TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST
7247 && 0 > compare_tree_int (index,
7248 list_length (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS
7249 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
7253 for (elem = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)),
7254 i = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index);
7255 elem != 0 && i != 0; i--, elem = TREE_CHAIN (elem))
7259 return expand_expr (fold (TREE_VALUE (elem)), target, tmode,
7263 else if (optimize >= 1
7264 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7265 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7266 && TREE_READONLY (array) && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array)
7267 && TREE_CODE (array) == VAR_DECL && DECL_INITIAL (array)
7268 && TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (array)) != ERROR_MARK)
7270 if (TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST)
7272 tree init = DECL_INITIAL (array);
7274 if (TREE_CODE (init) == CONSTRUCTOR)
7278 for (elem = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (init);
7280 && !tree_int_cst_equal (TREE_PURPOSE (elem), index));
7281 elem = TREE_CHAIN (elem))
7284 if (elem && !TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_VALUE (elem)))
7285 return expand_expr (fold (TREE_VALUE (elem)), target,
7288 else if (TREE_CODE (init) == STRING_CST
7289 && 0 > compare_tree_int (index,
7290 TREE_STRING_LENGTH (init)))
7292 tree type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (init));
7293 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
7295 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
7296 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == 1)
7297 return gen_int_mode (TREE_STRING_POINTER (init)
7298 [TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index)], mode);
7307 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF:
7308 /* If the operand is a CONSTRUCTOR, we can just extract the
7309 appropriate field if it is present. Don't do this if we have
7310 already written the data since we want to refer to that copy
7311 and varasm.c assumes that's what we'll do. */
7312 if (code == COMPONENT_REF
7313 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == CONSTRUCTOR
7314 && TREE_CST_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == 0)
7318 for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); elt;
7319 elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
7320 if (TREE_PURPOSE (elt) == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)
7321 /* We can normally use the value of the field in the
7322 CONSTRUCTOR. However, if this is a bitfield in
7323 an integral mode that we can fit in a HOST_WIDE_INT,
7324 we must mask only the number of bits in the bitfield,
7325 since this is done implicitly by the constructor. If
7326 the bitfield does not meet either of those conditions,
7327 we can't do this optimization. */
7328 && (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_PURPOSE (elt))
7329 || ((GET_MODE_CLASS (DECL_MODE (TREE_PURPOSE (elt)))
7331 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (DECL_MODE (TREE_PURPOSE (elt)))
7332 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT))))
7334 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_PURPOSE (elt))
7335 && modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
7337 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (elt), target, tmode, modifier);
7338 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_PURPOSE (elt)))
7340 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
7341 = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (TREE_PURPOSE (elt)));
7342 enum machine_mode imode
7343 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_PURPOSE (elt)));
7345 if (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_PURPOSE (elt))))
7347 op1 = GEN_INT (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bitsize) - 1);
7348 op0 = expand_and (imode, op0, op1, target);
7353 = build_int_2 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode) - bitsize,
7356 op0 = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, imode, op0, count,
7358 op0 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, imode, op0, count,
7368 enum machine_mode mode1;
7369 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, bitpos;
7372 tree tem = get_inner_reference (exp, &bitsize, &bitpos, &offset,
7373 &mode1, &unsignedp, &volatilep);
7376 /* If we got back the original object, something is wrong. Perhaps
7377 we are evaluating an expression too early. In any event, don't
7378 infinitely recurse. */
7382 /* If TEM's type is a union of variable size, pass TARGET to the inner
7383 computation, since it will need a temporary and TARGET is known
7384 to have to do. This occurs in unchecked conversion in Ada. */
7388 (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (tem)) == UNION_TYPE
7389 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (tem)))
7391 && modifier != EXPAND_STACK_PARM
7392 ? target : NULL_RTX),
7394 (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7395 || modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7396 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
7397 ? modifier : EXPAND_NORMAL);
7399 /* If this is a constant, put it into a register if it is a
7400 legitimate constant and OFFSET is 0 and memory if it isn't. */
7401 if (CONSTANT_P (op0))
7403 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (tem));
7404 if (mode != BLKmode && LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (op0)
7406 op0 = force_reg (mode, op0);
7408 op0 = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, op0));
7413 rtx offset_rtx = expand_expr (offset, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode,
7416 /* If this object is in a register, put it into memory.
7417 This case can't occur in C, but can in Ada if we have
7418 unchecked conversion of an expression from a scalar type to
7419 an array or record type. */
7420 if (GET_CODE (op0) == REG || GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
7421 || GET_CODE (op0) == CONCAT || GET_CODE (op0) == ADDRESSOF)
7423 /* If the operand is a SAVE_EXPR, we can deal with this by
7424 forcing the SAVE_EXPR into memory. */
7425 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == SAVE_EXPR)
7427 put_var_into_stack (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
7429 op0 = SAVE_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7434 = build_qualified_type (TREE_TYPE (tem),
7435 (TYPE_QUALS (TREE_TYPE (tem))
7436 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST));
7437 rtx memloc = assign_temp (nt, 1, 1, 1);
7439 emit_move_insn (memloc, op0);
7444 if (GET_CODE (op0) != MEM)
7447 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
7448 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode)
7449 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0);
7451 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode)
7452 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0);
7455 /* A constant address in OP0 can have VOIDmode, we must not try
7456 to call force_reg for that case. Avoid that case. */
7457 if (GET_CODE (op0) == MEM
7458 && GET_MODE (op0) == BLKmode
7459 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) != VOIDmode
7461 && (bitpos % bitsize) == 0
7462 && (bitsize % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)) == 0
7463 && MEM_ALIGN (op0) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1))
7465 op0 = adjust_address (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7469 op0 = offset_address (op0, offset_rtx,
7470 highest_pow2_factor (offset));
7473 /* If OFFSET is making OP0 more aligned than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT,
7474 record its alignment as BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
7475 if (GET_CODE (op0) == MEM && bitpos == 0 && offset != 0
7476 && is_aligning_offset (offset, tem))
7477 set_mem_align (op0, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT);
7479 /* Don't forget about volatility even if this is a bitfield. */
7480 if (GET_CODE (op0) == MEM && volatilep && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0))
7482 if (op0 == orig_op0)
7483 op0 = copy_rtx (op0);
7485 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) = 1;
7488 /* The following code doesn't handle CONCAT.
7489 Assume only bitpos == 0 can be used for CONCAT, due to
7490 one element arrays having the same mode as its element. */
7491 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONCAT)
7493 if (bitpos != 0 || bitsize != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)))
7498 /* In cases where an aligned union has an unaligned object
7499 as a field, we might be extracting a BLKmode value from
7500 an integer-mode (e.g., SImode) object. Handle this case
7501 by doing the extract into an object as wide as the field
7502 (which we know to be the width of a basic mode), then
7503 storing into memory, and changing the mode to BLKmode. */
7504 if (mode1 == VOIDmode
7505 || GET_CODE (op0) == REG || GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
7506 || (mode1 != BLKmode && ! direct_load[(int) mode1]
7507 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
7508 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
7509 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7510 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7511 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to fetch as a memref,
7512 fetch it as a bit field. */
7513 || (mode1 != BLKmode
7514 && ((TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem)) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)
7515 && SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode1, MEM_ALIGN (op0)))
7516 || (bitpos % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) != 0)))
7517 /* If the type and the field are a constant size and the
7518 size of the type isn't the same size as the bitfield,
7519 we must use bitfield operations. */
7521 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
7523 && 0 != compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
7526 enum machine_mode ext_mode = mode;
7528 if (ext_mode == BLKmode
7529 && ! (target != 0 && GET_CODE (op0) == MEM
7530 && GET_CODE (target) == MEM
7531 && bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0))
7532 ext_mode = mode_for_size (bitsize, MODE_INT, 1);
7534 if (ext_mode == BLKmode)
7536 /* In this case, BITPOS must start at a byte boundary and
7537 TARGET, if specified, must be a MEM. */
7538 if (GET_CODE (op0) != MEM
7539 || (target != 0 && GET_CODE (target) != MEM)
7540 || bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT != 0)
7543 op0 = adjust_address (op0, VOIDmode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7545 target = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1);
7547 emit_block_move (target, op0,
7548 GEN_INT ((bitsize + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1)
7550 (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
7551 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
7556 op0 = validize_mem (op0);
7558 if (GET_CODE (op0) == MEM && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == REG)
7559 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0));
7561 op0 = extract_bit_field (op0, bitsize, bitpos, unsignedp,
7562 (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
7563 ? NULL_RTX : target),
7565 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (tem)));
7567 /* If the result is a record type and BITSIZE is narrower than
7568 the mode of OP0, an integral mode, and this is a big endian
7569 machine, we must put the field into the high-order bits. */
7570 if (TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE && BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
7571 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT
7572 && bitsize < (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)))
7573 op0 = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (op0), op0,
7574 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0))
7578 if (mode == BLKmode)
7580 rtx new = assign_temp (build_qualified_type
7581 ((*lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode)
7583 TYPE_QUAL_CONST), 0, 1, 1);
7585 emit_move_insn (new, op0);
7586 op0 = copy_rtx (new);
7587 PUT_MODE (op0, BLKmode);
7588 set_mem_attributes (op0, exp, 1);
7594 /* If the result is BLKmode, use that to access the object
7596 if (mode == BLKmode)
7599 /* Get a reference to just this component. */
7600 if (modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7601 || modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7602 op0 = adjust_address_nv (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7604 op0 = adjust_address (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7606 if (op0 == orig_op0)
7607 op0 = copy_rtx (op0);
7609 set_mem_attributes (op0, exp, 0);
7610 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == REG)
7611 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0));
7613 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) |= volatilep;
7614 if (mode == mode1 || mode1 == BLKmode || mode1 == tmode
7615 || modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7616 || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7618 else if (target == 0)
7619 target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode);
7621 convert_move (target, op0, unsignedp);
7627 rtx insn, before = get_last_insn (), vtbl_ref;
7629 /* Evaluate the interior expression. */
7630 subtarget = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target,
7633 /* Get or create an instruction off which to hang a note. */
7634 if (REG_P (subtarget))
7637 insn = get_last_insn ();
7640 if (! INSN_P (insn))
7641 insn = prev_nonnote_insn (insn);
7645 target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (subtarget));
7646 insn = emit_move_insn (target, subtarget);
7649 /* Collect the data for the note. */
7650 vtbl_ref = XEXP (DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)), 0);
7651 vtbl_ref = plus_constant (vtbl_ref,
7652 tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0));
7653 /* Discard the initial CONST that was added. */
7654 vtbl_ref = XEXP (vtbl_ref, 0);
7657 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (REG_VTABLE_REF, vtbl_ref, REG_NOTES (insn));
7662 /* Intended for a reference to a buffer of a file-object in Pascal.
7663 But it's not certain that a special tree code will really be
7664 necessary for these. INDIRECT_REF might work for them. */
7670 /* Pascal set IN expression.
7673 rlo = set_low - (set_low%bits_per_word);
7674 the_word = set [ (index - rlo)/bits_per_word ];
7675 bit_index = index % bits_per_word;
7676 bitmask = 1 << bit_index;
7677 return !!(the_word & bitmask); */
7679 tree set = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
7680 tree index = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
7681 int iunsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (index));
7682 tree set_type = TREE_TYPE (set);
7683 tree set_low_bound = TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (set_type));
7684 tree set_high_bound = TYPE_MAX_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (set_type));
7685 rtx index_val = expand_expr (index, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
7686 rtx lo_r = expand_expr (set_low_bound, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
7687 rtx hi_r = expand_expr (set_high_bound, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
7688 rtx setval = expand_expr (set, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
7689 rtx setaddr = XEXP (setval, 0);
7690 enum machine_mode index_mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (index));
7692 rtx diff, quo, rem, addr, bit, result;
7694 /* If domain is empty, answer is no. Likewise if index is constant
7695 and out of bounds. */
7696 if (((TREE_CODE (set_high_bound) == INTEGER_CST
7697 && TREE_CODE (set_low_bound) == INTEGER_CST
7698 && tree_int_cst_lt (set_high_bound, set_low_bound))
7699 || (TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST
7700 && TREE_CODE (set_low_bound) == INTEGER_CST
7701 && tree_int_cst_lt (index, set_low_bound))
7702 || (TREE_CODE (set_high_bound) == INTEGER_CST
7703 && TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST
7704 && tree_int_cst_lt (set_high_bound, index))))
7708 target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode);
7710 /* If we get here, we have to generate the code for both cases
7711 (in range and out of range). */
7713 op0 = gen_label_rtx ();
7714 op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
7716 if (! (GET_CODE (index_val) == CONST_INT
7717 && GET_CODE (lo_r) == CONST_INT))
7718 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index_val, lo_r, LT, NULL_RTX,
7719 GET_MODE (index_val), iunsignedp, op1);
7721 if (! (GET_CODE (index_val) == CONST_INT
7722 && GET_CODE (hi_r) == CONST_INT))
7723 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index_val, hi_r, GT, NULL_RTX,
7724 GET_MODE (index_val), iunsignedp, op1);
7726 /* Calculate the element number of bit zero in the first word
7728 if (GET_CODE (lo_r) == CONST_INT)
7729 rlow = GEN_INT (INTVAL (lo_r)
7730 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << BITS_PER_UNIT));
7732 rlow = expand_binop (index_mode, and_optab, lo_r,
7733 GEN_INT (~((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << BITS_PER_UNIT)),
7734 NULL_RTX, iunsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
7736 diff = expand_binop (index_mode, sub_optab, index_val, rlow,
7737 NULL_RTX, iunsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
7739 quo = expand_divmod (0, TRUNC_DIV_EXPR, index_mode, diff,
7740 GEN_INT (BITS_PER_UNIT), NULL_RTX, iunsignedp);
7741 rem = expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR, index_mode, index_val,
7742 GEN_INT (BITS_PER_UNIT), NULL_RTX, iunsignedp);
7744 addr = memory_address (byte_mode,
7745 expand_binop (index_mode, add_optab, diff,
7746 setaddr, NULL_RTX, iunsignedp,
7749 /* Extract the bit we want to examine. */
7750 bit = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, byte_mode,
7751 gen_rtx_MEM (byte_mode, addr),
7752 make_tree (TREE_TYPE (index), rem),
7754 result = expand_binop (byte_mode, and_optab, bit, const1_rtx,
7755 GET_MODE (target) == byte_mode ? target : 0,
7756 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
7758 if (result != target)
7759 convert_move (target, result, 1);
7761 /* Output the code to handle the out-of-range case. */
7764 emit_move_insn (target, const0_rtx);
7769 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
7770 if (WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR_RTL (exp) == 0)
7772 WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR_RTL (exp)
7773 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode, modifier);
7774 expand_decl_cleanup_eh (NULL_TREE, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
7775 CLEANUP_EH_ONLY (exp));
7777 /* That's it for this cleanup. */
7778 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = 0;
7780 return WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR_RTL (exp);
7782 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR:
7784 /* Start a new binding layer that will keep track of all cleanup
7785 actions to be performed. */
7786 expand_start_bindings (2);
7788 target_temp_slot_level = temp_slot_level;
7790 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode, modifier);
7791 /* If we're going to use this value, load it up now. */
7793 op0 = force_not_mem (op0);
7794 preserve_temp_slots (op0);
7795 expand_end_bindings (NULL_TREE, 0, 0);
7800 /* Check for a built-in function. */
7801 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
7802 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))
7804 && DECL_BUILT_IN (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
7806 if (DECL_BUILT_IN_CLASS (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))
7807 == BUILT_IN_FRONTEND)
7808 return (*lang_hooks.expand_expr) (exp, original_target,
7811 return expand_builtin (exp, target, subtarget, tmode, ignore);
7814 return expand_call (exp, target, ignore);
7816 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR:
7819 case REFERENCE_EXPR:
7820 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) == error_mark_node)
7823 if (TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE)
7825 tree valtype = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7827 /* If both input and output are BLKmode, this conversion isn't doing
7828 anything except possibly changing memory attribute. */
7829 if (mode == BLKmode && TYPE_MODE (valtype) == BLKmode)
7831 rtx result = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode,
7834 result = copy_rtx (result);
7835 set_mem_attributes (result, exp, 0);
7840 target = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1);
7842 if (GET_CODE (target) == MEM)
7843 /* Store data into beginning of memory target. */
7844 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
7845 adjust_address (target, TYPE_MODE (valtype), 0),
7846 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
7848 else if (GET_CODE (target) == REG)
7849 /* Store this field into a union of the proper type. */
7850 store_field (target,
7851 MIN ((int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE
7852 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
7854 (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)),
7855 0, TYPE_MODE (valtype), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
7856 VOIDmode, 0, type, 0);
7860 /* Return the entire union. */
7864 if (mode == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
7866 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode,
7869 /* If the signedness of the conversion differs and OP0 is
7870 a promoted SUBREG, clear that indication since we now
7871 have to do the proper extension. */
7872 if (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) != unsignedp
7873 && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG)
7874 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (op0) = 0;
7879 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), NULL_RTX, mode, modifier);
7880 if (GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
7883 /* If OP0 is a constant, just convert it into the proper mode. */
7884 if (CONSTANT_P (op0))
7886 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7887 enum machine_mode inner_mode = TYPE_MODE (inner_type);
7889 if (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7890 return simplify_gen_subreg (mode, op0, inner_mode,
7891 subreg_lowpart_offset (mode,
7894 return convert_modes (mode, inner_mode, op0,
7895 TREE_UNSIGNED (inner_type));
7898 if (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7899 return gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND, mode, op0);
7903 convert_to_mode (mode, op0,
7904 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
7906 convert_move (target, op0,
7907 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
7910 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR:
7911 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), NULL_RTX, mode, modifier);
7913 /* If the input and output modes are both the same, we are done.
7914 Otherwise, if neither mode is BLKmode and both are within a word, we
7915 can use gen_lowpart. If neither is true, make sure the operand is
7916 in memory and convert the MEM to the new mode. */
7917 if (TYPE_MODE (type) == GET_MODE (op0))
7919 else if (TYPE_MODE (type) != BLKmode && GET_MODE (op0) != BLKmode
7920 && GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
7921 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
7922 op0 = gen_lowpart (TYPE_MODE (type), op0);
7923 else if (GET_CODE (op0) != MEM)
7925 /* If the operand is not a MEM, force it into memory. Since we
7926 are going to be be changing the mode of the MEM, don't call
7927 force_const_mem for constants because we don't allow pool
7928 constants to change mode. */
7929 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7931 if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp))
7934 if (target == 0 || GET_MODE (target) != TYPE_MODE (inner_type))
7936 = assign_stack_temp_for_type
7937 (TYPE_MODE (inner_type),
7938 GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (inner_type)), 0, inner_type);
7940 emit_move_insn (target, op0);
7944 /* At this point, OP0 is in the correct mode. If the output type is such
7945 that the operand is known to be aligned, indicate that it is.
7946 Otherwise, we need only be concerned about alignment for non-BLKmode
7948 if (GET_CODE (op0) == MEM)
7950 op0 = copy_rtx (op0);
7952 if (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (type))
7953 set_mem_align (op0, MAX (MEM_ALIGN (op0), TYPE_ALIGN (type)));
7954 else if (TYPE_MODE (type) != BLKmode && STRICT_ALIGNMENT
7955 && MEM_ALIGN (op0) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (TYPE_MODE (type)))
7957 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7958 HOST_WIDE_INT temp_size
7959 = MAX (int_size_in_bytes (inner_type),
7960 (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type)));
7961 rtx new = assign_stack_temp_for_type (TYPE_MODE (type),
7962 temp_size, 0, type);
7963 rtx new_with_op0_mode = adjust_address (new, GET_MODE (op0), 0);
7965 if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp))
7968 if (GET_MODE (op0) == BLKmode)
7969 emit_block_move (new_with_op0_mode, op0,
7970 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type))),
7971 (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
7972 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
7974 emit_move_insn (new_with_op0_mode, op0);
7979 op0 = adjust_address (op0, TYPE_MODE (type), 0);
7985 this_optab = ! unsignedp && flag_trapv
7986 && (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
7987 ? addv_optab : add_optab;
7989 /* If we are adding a constant, an RTL_EXPR that is sp, fp, or ap, and
7990 something else, make sure we add the register to the constant and
7991 then to the other thing. This case can occur during strength
7992 reduction and doing it this way will produce better code if the
7993 frame pointer or argument pointer is eliminated.
7995 fold-const.c will ensure that the constant is always in the inner
7996 PLUS_EXPR, so the only case we need to do anything about is if
7997 sp, ap, or fp is our second argument, in which case we must swap
7998 the innermost first argument and our second argument. */
8000 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == PLUS_EXPR
8001 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1)) == INTEGER_CST
8002 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == RTL_EXPR
8003 && (RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == frame_pointer_rtx
8004 || RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == stack_pointer_rtx
8005 || RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == arg_pointer_rtx))
8007 tree t = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8009 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
8010 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0) = t;
8013 /* If the result is to be ptr_mode and we are adding an integer to
8014 something, we might be forming a constant. So try to use
8015 plus_constant. If it produces a sum and we can't accept it,
8016 use force_operand. This allows P = &ARR[const] to generate
8017 efficient code on machines where a SYMBOL_REF is not a valid
8020 If this is an EXPAND_SUM call, always return the sum. */
8021 if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8022 || (mode == ptr_mode && (unsignedp || ! flag_trapv)))
8024 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8026 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST
8027 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8028 && TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
8032 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), subtarget, VOIDmode,
8034 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
8035 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
8036 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
8037 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
8039 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)),
8041 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))));
8042 op1 = plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (constant_part));
8043 if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8044 op1 = force_operand (op1, target);
8048 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
8049 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
8050 && TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
8054 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode,
8055 (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8056 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER : EXPAND_SUM));
8057 if (! CONSTANT_P (op0))
8059 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX,
8060 VOIDmode, modifier);
8061 /* Don't go to both_summands if modifier
8062 says it's not right to return a PLUS. */
8063 if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8067 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
8068 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
8069 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
8070 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
8072 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)),
8074 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
8075 op0 = plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (constant_part));
8076 if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8077 op0 = force_operand (op0, target);
8082 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
8085 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
8086 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
8087 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
8089 if ((modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8090 || mode != ptr_mode)
8092 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8093 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8094 if (op0 == const0_rtx)
8096 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
8101 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, modifier);
8102 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, modifier);
8104 /* We come here from MINUS_EXPR when the second operand is a
8107 /* Make sure any term that's a sum with a constant comes last. */
8108 if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
8109 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 1)))
8115 /* If adding to a sum including a constant,
8116 associate it to put the constant outside. */
8117 if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
8118 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op1, 1)))
8120 rtx constant_term = const0_rtx;
8122 temp = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, XEXP (op1, 0), op0);
8125 /* Ensure that MULT comes first if there is one. */
8126 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == MULT)
8127 op0 = gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
8129 op0 = gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, XEXP (op1, 0), op0);
8131 /* Let's also eliminate constants from op0 if possible. */
8132 op0 = eliminate_constant_term (op0, &constant_term);
8134 /* CONSTANT_TERM and XEXP (op1, 1) are known to be constant, so
8135 their sum should be a constant. Form it into OP1, since the
8136 result we want will then be OP0 + OP1. */
8138 temp = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, constant_term,
8143 op1 = gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, constant_term, XEXP (op1, 1));
8146 /* Put a constant term last and put a multiplication first. */
8147 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) || GET_CODE (op1) == MULT)
8148 temp = op1, op1 = op0, op0 = temp;
8150 temp = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, op0, op1);
8151 return temp ? temp : gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, op0, op1);
8154 /* For initializers, we are allowed to return a MINUS of two
8155 symbolic constants. Here we handle all cases when both operands
8157 /* Handle difference of two symbolic constants,
8158 for the sake of an initializer. */
8159 if ((modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8160 && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
8161 && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
8163 rtx op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode,
8165 rtx op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode,
8168 /* If the last operand is a CONST_INT, use plus_constant of
8169 the negated constant. Else make the MINUS. */
8170 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
8171 return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
8173 return gen_rtx_MINUS (mode, op0, op1);
8176 this_optab = ! unsignedp && flag_trapv
8177 && (GET_MODE_CLASS(mode) == MODE_INT)
8178 ? subv_optab : sub_optab;
8180 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
8181 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
8182 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
8184 if ((modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8185 || mode != ptr_mode)
8188 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
8191 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, modifier);
8192 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, modifier);
8194 /* Convert A - const to A + (-const). */
8195 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
8197 op1 = negate_rtx (mode, op1);
8204 /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
8205 Thus the following special case checks need only
8206 check the second operand. */
8207 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST)
8209 tree t1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8210 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8211 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = t1;
8214 /* Attempt to return something suitable for generating an
8215 indexed address, for machines that support that. */
8217 if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM && mode == ptr_mode
8218 && host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0))
8220 tree exp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8222 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode,
8225 /* If we knew for certain that this is arithmetic for an array
8226 reference, and we knew the bounds of the array, then we could
8227 apply the distributive law across (PLUS X C) for constant C.
8228 Without such knowledge, we risk overflowing the computation
8229 when both X and C are large, but X+C isn't. */
8230 /* ??? Could perhaps special-case EXP being unsigned and C being
8231 positive. In that case we are certain that X+C is no smaller
8232 than X and so the transformed expression will overflow iff the
8233 original would have. */
8235 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
8236 op0 = force_operand (op0, NULL_RTX);
8237 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
8238 op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op0);
8240 return gen_rtx_MULT (mode, op0,
8241 gen_int_mode (tree_low_cst (exp1, 0),
8242 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp1))));
8245 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
8248 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8251 /* Check for multiplying things that have been extended
8252 from a narrower type. If this machine supports multiplying
8253 in that narrower type with a result in the desired type,
8254 do it that way, and avoid the explicit type-conversion. */
8255 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == NOP_EXPR
8256 && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
8257 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
8258 < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
8259 && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
8260 && int_fits_type_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8261 TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
8262 /* Don't use a widening multiply if a shift will do. */
8263 && ((GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))))
8264 > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8265 || exact_log2 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) < 0))
8267 (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == NOP_EXPR
8268 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)))
8270 TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))))
8271 /* If both operands are extended, they must either both
8272 be zero-extended or both be sign-extended. */
8273 && (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)))
8275 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))))))
8277 enum machine_mode innermode
8278 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)));
8279 optab other_optab = (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
8280 ? smul_widen_optab : umul_widen_optab);
8281 this_optab = (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
8282 ? umul_widen_optab : smul_widen_optab);
8283 if (mode == GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (innermode))
8285 if (this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
8287 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
8288 NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8289 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST)
8290 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX,
8293 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0),
8294 NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8297 else if (other_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing
8298 && innermode == word_mode)
8301 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
8302 NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8303 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST)
8304 op1 = convert_modes (innermode, mode,
8305 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8306 NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0),
8309 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0),
8310 NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8311 temp = expand_binop (mode, other_optab, op0, op1, target,
8312 unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
8313 htem = expand_mult_highpart_adjust (innermode,
8314 gen_highpart (innermode, temp),
8316 gen_highpart (innermode, temp),
8318 emit_move_insn (gen_highpart (innermode, temp), htem);
8323 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8324 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8325 return expand_mult (mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
8327 case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR:
8328 case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR:
8330 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR:
8331 case EXACT_DIV_EXPR:
8332 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
8334 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8336 /* Possible optimization: compute the dividend with EXPAND_SUM
8337 then if the divisor is constant can optimize the case
8338 where some terms of the dividend have coeffs divisible by it. */
8339 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8340 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8341 return expand_divmod (0, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
8344 /* Emit a/b as a*(1/b). Later we may manage CSE the reciprocal saving
8345 expensive divide. If not, combine will rebuild the original
8347 if (flag_unsafe_math_optimizations && optimize && !optimize_size
8348 && TREE_CODE (type) == REAL_TYPE
8349 && !real_onep (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
8350 return expand_expr (build (MULT_EXPR, type, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
8351 build (RDIV_EXPR, type,
8352 build_real (type, dconst1),
8353 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))),
8354 target, tmode, modifier);
8355 this_optab = sdiv_optab;
8358 case TRUNC_MOD_EXPR:
8359 case FLOOR_MOD_EXPR:
8361 case ROUND_MOD_EXPR:
8362 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
8364 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8366 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8367 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8368 return expand_divmod (1, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
8370 case FIX_ROUND_EXPR:
8371 case FIX_FLOOR_EXPR:
8373 abort (); /* Not used for C. */
8375 case FIX_TRUNC_EXPR:
8376 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8377 if (target == 0 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8378 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8379 expand_fix (target, op0, unsignedp);
8383 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8384 if (target == 0 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8385 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8386 /* expand_float can't figure out what to do if FROM has VOIDmode.
8387 So give it the correct mode. With -O, cse will optimize this. */
8388 if (GET_MODE (op0) == VOIDmode)
8389 op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))),
8391 expand_float (target, op0,
8392 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
8396 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8397 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8399 temp = expand_unop (mode,
8400 ! unsignedp && flag_trapv
8401 && (GET_MODE_CLASS(mode) == MODE_INT)
8402 ? negv_optab : neg_optab, op0, target, 0);
8408 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8409 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8412 /* Handle complex values specially. */
8413 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT
8414 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
8415 return expand_complex_abs (mode, op0, target, unsignedp);
8417 /* Unsigned abs is simply the operand. Testing here means we don't
8418 risk generating incorrect code below. */
8419 if (TREE_UNSIGNED (type))
8422 return expand_abs (mode, op0, target, unsignedp,
8423 safe_from_p (target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1));
8427 target = original_target;
8429 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8430 || ! safe_from_p (target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1)
8431 || (GET_CODE (target) == MEM && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target))
8432 || GET_MODE (target) != mode
8433 || (GET_CODE (target) == REG
8434 && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
8435 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8436 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8437 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, 0);
8439 /* First try to do it with a special MIN or MAX instruction.
8440 If that does not win, use a conditional jump to select the proper
8442 this_optab = (TREE_UNSIGNED (type)
8443 ? (code == MIN_EXPR ? umin_optab : umax_optab)
8444 : (code == MIN_EXPR ? smin_optab : smax_optab));
8446 temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target, unsignedp,
8451 /* At this point, a MEM target is no longer useful; we will get better
8454 if (GET_CODE (target) == MEM)
8455 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8458 emit_move_insn (target, op0);
8460 op0 = gen_label_rtx ();
8462 /* If this mode is an integer too wide to compare properly,
8463 compare word by word. Rely on cse to optimize constant cases. */
8464 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
8465 && ! can_compare_p (GE, mode, ccp_jump))
8467 if (code == MAX_EXPR)
8468 do_jump_by_parts_greater_rtx (mode, TREE_UNSIGNED (type),
8469 target, op1, NULL_RTX, op0);
8471 do_jump_by_parts_greater_rtx (mode, TREE_UNSIGNED (type),
8472 op1, target, NULL_RTX, op0);
8476 int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)));
8477 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (target, op1, code == MAX_EXPR ? GE : LE,
8478 unsignedp, mode, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
8481 emit_move_insn (target, op1);
8486 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8487 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8489 temp = expand_unop (mode, one_cmpl_optab, op0, target, 1);
8495 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8496 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8498 temp = expand_unop (mode, ffs_optab, op0, target, 1);
8504 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8505 temp = expand_unop (mode, clz_optab, op0, target, 1);
8511 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8512 temp = expand_unop (mode, ctz_optab, op0, target, 1);
8518 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8519 temp = expand_unop (mode, popcount_optab, op0, target, 1);
8525 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8526 temp = expand_unop (mode, parity_optab, op0, target, 1);
8531 /* ??? Can optimize bitwise operations with one arg constant.
8532 Can optimize (a bitwise1 n) bitwise2 (a bitwise3 b)
8533 and (a bitwise1 b) bitwise2 b (etc)
8534 but that is probably not worth while. */
8536 /* BIT_AND_EXPR is for bitwise anding. TRUTH_AND_EXPR is for anding two
8537 boolean values when we want in all cases to compute both of them. In
8538 general it is fastest to do TRUTH_AND_EXPR by computing both operands
8539 as actual zero-or-1 values and then bitwise anding. In cases where
8540 there cannot be any side effects, better code would be made by
8541 treating TRUTH_AND_EXPR like TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR; but the question is
8542 how to recognize those cases. */
8544 case TRUTH_AND_EXPR:
8546 this_optab = and_optab;
8551 this_optab = ior_optab;
8554 case TRUTH_XOR_EXPR:
8556 this_optab = xor_optab;
8563 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
8565 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8567 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
8568 return expand_shift (code, mode, op0, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target,
8571 /* Could determine the answer when only additive constants differ. Also,
8572 the addition of one can be handled by changing the condition. */
8579 case UNORDERED_EXPR:
8586 temp = do_store_flag (exp,
8587 modifier != EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? target : NULL_RTX,
8588 tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode, 0);
8592 /* For foo != 0, load foo, and if it is nonzero load 1 instead. */
8593 if (code == NE_EXPR && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
8595 && GET_CODE (original_target) == REG
8596 && (GET_MODE (original_target)
8597 == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
8599 temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), original_target,
8602 /* If temp is constant, we can just compute the result. */
8603 if (GET_CODE (temp) == CONST_INT)
8605 if (INTVAL (temp) != 0)
8606 emit_move_insn (target, const1_rtx);
8608 emit_move_insn (target, const0_rtx);
8613 if (temp != original_target)
8615 enum machine_mode mode1 = GET_MODE (temp);
8616 if (mode1 == VOIDmode)
8617 mode1 = tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode;
8619 temp = copy_to_mode_reg (mode1, temp);
8622 op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
8623 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (temp, const0_rtx, EQ, NULL_RTX,
8624 GET_MODE (temp), unsignedp, op1);
8625 emit_move_insn (temp, const1_rtx);
8630 /* If no set-flag instruction, must generate a conditional
8631 store into a temporary variable. Drop through
8632 and handle this like && and ||. */
8634 case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR:
8635 case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR:
8638 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8639 || ! safe_from_p (target, exp, 1)
8640 /* Make sure we don't have a hard reg (such as function's return
8641 value) live across basic blocks, if not optimizing. */
8642 || (!optimize && GET_CODE (target) == REG
8643 && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
8644 target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode);
8647 emit_clr_insn (target);
8649 op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
8650 jumpifnot (exp, op1);
8653 emit_0_to_1_insn (target);
8656 return ignore ? const0_rtx : target;
8658 case TRUTH_NOT_EXPR:
8659 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8661 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, 0);
8662 /* The parser is careful to generate TRUTH_NOT_EXPR
8663 only with operands that are always zero or one. */
8664 temp = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, op0, const1_rtx,
8665 target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
8671 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
8673 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8674 (ignore ? const0_rtx : target),
8675 VOIDmode, modifier);
8678 /* If we would have a "singleton" (see below) were it not for a
8679 conversion in each arm, bring that conversion back out. */
8680 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == NOP_EXPR
8681 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) == NOP_EXPR
8682 && (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0))
8683 == TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0))))
8685 tree iftrue = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0);
8686 tree iffalse = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0);
8688 if ((TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (iftrue)) == '2'
8689 && operand_equal_p (iffalse, TREE_OPERAND (iftrue, 0), 0))
8690 || (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (iffalse)) == '2'
8691 && operand_equal_p (iftrue, TREE_OPERAND (iffalse, 0), 0))
8692 || (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (iftrue)) == '1'
8693 && operand_equal_p (iffalse, TREE_OPERAND (iftrue, 0), 0))
8694 || (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (iffalse)) == '1'
8695 && operand_equal_p (iftrue, TREE_OPERAND (iffalse, 0), 0)))
8696 return expand_expr (build1 (NOP_EXPR, type,
8697 build (COND_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (iftrue),
8698 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
8700 target, tmode, modifier);
8704 /* Note that COND_EXPRs whose type is a structure or union
8705 are required to be constructed to contain assignments of
8706 a temporary variable, so that we can evaluate them here
8707 for side effect only. If type is void, we must do likewise. */
8709 /* If an arm of the branch requires a cleanup,
8710 only that cleanup is performed. */
8713 tree binary_op = 0, unary_op = 0;
8715 /* If this is (A ? 1 : 0) and A is a condition, just evaluate it and
8716 convert it to our mode, if necessary. */
8717 if (integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
8718 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))
8719 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<')
8723 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode,
8728 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8730 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, mode, modifier);
8731 if (GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
8735 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8736 convert_move (target, op0, unsignedp);
8740 /* Check for X ? A + B : A. If we have this, we can copy A to the
8741 output and conditionally add B. Similarly for unary operations.
8742 Don't do this if X has side-effects because those side effects
8743 might affect A or B and the "?" operation is a sequence point in
8744 ANSI. (operand_equal_p tests for side effects.) */
8746 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == '2'
8747 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2),
8748 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0), 0))
8749 singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), binary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8750 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))) == '2'
8751 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8752 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0), 0))
8753 singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), binary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
8754 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == '1'
8755 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2),
8756 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0), 0))
8757 singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), unary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8758 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))) == '1'
8759 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8760 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0), 0))
8761 singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), unary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
8763 /* If we are not to produce a result, we have no target. Otherwise,
8764 if a target was specified use it; it will not be used as an
8765 intermediate target unless it is safe. If no target, use a
8770 else if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8771 temp = assign_temp (type, 0, 0, 1);
8772 else if (original_target
8773 && (safe_from_p (original_target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1)
8774 || (singleton && GET_CODE (original_target) == REG
8775 && REGNO (original_target) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8776 && original_target == var_rtx (singleton)))
8777 && GET_MODE (original_target) == mode
8778 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
8779 && (! can_conditionally_move_p (mode)
8780 || GET_CODE (original_target) == REG
8781 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type))
8783 && (GET_CODE (original_target) != MEM
8784 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type)))
8785 temp = original_target;
8786 else if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type))
8789 temp = assign_temp (type, 0, 0, 1);
8791 /* If we had X ? A + C : A, with C a constant power of 2, and we can
8792 do the test of X as a store-flag operation, do this as
8793 A + ((X != 0) << log C). Similarly for other simple binary
8794 operators. Only do for C == 1 if BRANCH_COST is low. */
8795 if (temp && singleton && binary_op
8796 && (TREE_CODE (binary_op) == PLUS_EXPR
8797 || TREE_CODE (binary_op) == MINUS_EXPR
8798 || TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
8799 || TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_XOR_EXPR)
8800 && (BRANCH_COST >= 3 ? integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1))
8801 : integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1)))
8802 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<')
8806 optab boptab = (TREE_CODE (binary_op) == PLUS_EXPR
8807 ? (TYPE_TRAP_SIGNED (TREE_TYPE (binary_op))
8808 ? addv_optab : add_optab)
8809 : TREE_CODE (binary_op) == MINUS_EXPR
8810 ? (TYPE_TRAP_SIGNED (TREE_TYPE (binary_op))
8811 ? subv_optab : sub_optab)
8812 : TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_IOR_EXPR ? ior_optab
8815 /* If we had X ? A : A + 1, do this as A + (X == 0). */
8816 if (singleton == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
8817 cond = invert_truthvalue (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8819 cond = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8821 result = do_store_flag (cond, (safe_from_p (temp, singleton, 1)
8823 mode, BRANCH_COST <= 1);
8825 if (result != 0 && ! integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1)))
8826 result = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, mode, result,
8827 build_int_2 (tree_log2
8831 (safe_from_p (temp, singleton, 1)
8832 ? temp : NULL_RTX), 0);
8836 op1 = expand_expr (singleton, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8837 return expand_binop (mode, boptab, op1, result, temp,
8838 unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
8842 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
8844 op0 = gen_label_rtx ();
8846 if (singleton && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
8850 /* If the target conflicts with the other operand of the
8851 binary op, we can't use it. Also, we can't use the target
8852 if it is a hard register, because evaluating the condition
8853 might clobber it. */
8855 && ! safe_from_p (temp, TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1), 1))
8856 || (GET_CODE (temp) == REG
8857 && REGNO (temp) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
8858 temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8859 store_expr (singleton, temp,
8860 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
8863 expand_expr (singleton,
8864 ignore ? const0_rtx : NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8865 if (singleton == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
8866 jumpif (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
8868 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
8870 start_cleanup_deferral ();
8871 if (binary_op && temp == 0)
8872 /* Just touch the other operand. */
8873 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1),
8874 ignore ? const0_rtx : NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8876 store_expr (build (TREE_CODE (binary_op), type,
8877 make_tree (type, temp),
8878 TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1)),
8879 temp, modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
8881 store_expr (build1 (TREE_CODE (unary_op), type,
8882 make_tree (type, temp)),
8883 temp, modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
8886 /* Check for A op 0 ? A : FOO and A op 0 ? FOO : A where OP is any
8887 comparison operator. If we have one of these cases, set the
8888 output to A, branch on A (cse will merge these two references),
8889 then set the output to FOO. */
8891 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<'
8892 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1))
8893 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
8894 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)
8895 && (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
8896 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == SAVE_EXPR)
8897 && safe_from_p (temp, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 1))
8899 if (GET_CODE (temp) == REG
8900 && REGNO (temp) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
8901 temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8902 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp,
8903 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
8904 jumpif (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
8906 start_cleanup_deferral ();
8907 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp,
8908 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
8912 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<'
8913 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1))
8914 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
8915 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0)
8916 && (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
8917 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) == SAVE_EXPR)
8918 && safe_from_p (temp, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
8920 if (GET_CODE (temp) == REG
8921 && REGNO (temp) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
8922 temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8923 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp,
8924 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
8925 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
8927 start_cleanup_deferral ();
8928 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp,
8929 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
8934 op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
8935 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
8937 start_cleanup_deferral ();
8939 /* One branch of the cond can be void, if it never returns. For
8940 example A ? throw : E */
8942 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) != void_type_node)
8943 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp,
8944 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
8946 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8947 ignore ? const0_rtx : NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8948 end_cleanup_deferral ();
8950 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (op1));
8953 start_cleanup_deferral ();
8955 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) != void_type_node)
8956 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp,
8957 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
8959 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2),
8960 ignore ? const0_rtx : NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
8963 end_cleanup_deferral ();
8974 /* Something needs to be initialized, but we didn't know
8975 where that thing was when building the tree. For example,
8976 it could be the return value of a function, or a parameter
8977 to a function which lays down in the stack, or a temporary
8978 variable which must be passed by reference.
8980 We guarantee that the expression will either be constructed
8981 or copied into our original target. */
8983 tree slot = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8984 tree cleanups = NULL_TREE;
8987 if (TREE_CODE (slot) != VAR_DECL)
8991 target = original_target;
8993 /* Set this here so that if we get a target that refers to a
8994 register variable that's already been used, put_reg_into_stack
8995 knows that it should fix up those uses. */
8996 TREE_USED (slot) = 1;
9000 if (DECL_RTL_SET_P (slot))
9002 target = DECL_RTL (slot);
9003 /* If we have already expanded the slot, so don't do
9005 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) == NULL_TREE)
9010 target = assign_temp (type, 2, 0, 1);
9011 /* All temp slots at this level must not conflict. */
9012 preserve_temp_slots (target);
9013 SET_DECL_RTL (slot, target);
9014 if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (slot))
9015 put_var_into_stack (slot, /*rescan=*/false);
9017 /* Since SLOT is not known to the called function
9018 to belong to its stack frame, we must build an explicit
9019 cleanup. This case occurs when we must build up a reference
9020 to pass the reference as an argument. In this case,
9021 it is very likely that such a reference need not be
9024 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2) == 0)
9025 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)
9026 = (*lang_hooks.maybe_build_cleanup) (slot);
9027 cleanups = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
9032 /* This case does occur, when expanding a parameter which
9033 needs to be constructed on the stack. The target
9034 is the actual stack address that we want to initialize.
9035 The function we call will perform the cleanup in this case. */
9037 /* If we have already assigned it space, use that space,
9038 not target that we were passed in, as our target
9039 parameter is only a hint. */
9040 if (DECL_RTL_SET_P (slot))
9042 target = DECL_RTL (slot);
9043 /* If we have already expanded the slot, so don't do
9045 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) == NULL_TREE)
9050 SET_DECL_RTL (slot, target);
9051 /* If we must have an addressable slot, then make sure that
9052 the RTL that we just stored in slot is OK. */
9053 if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (slot))
9054 put_var_into_stack (slot, /*rescan=*/true);
9058 exp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 3) = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9059 /* Mark it as expanded. */
9060 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = NULL_TREE;
9062 store_expr (exp1, target, modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? 2 : 0);
9064 expand_decl_cleanup_eh (NULL_TREE, cleanups, CLEANUP_EH_ONLY (exp));
9071 tree lhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9072 tree rhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9074 temp = expand_assignment (lhs, rhs, ! ignore, original_target != 0);
9080 /* If lhs is complex, expand calls in rhs before computing it.
9081 That's so we don't compute a pointer and save it over a
9082 call. If lhs is simple, compute it first so we can give it
9083 as a target if the rhs is just a call. This avoids an
9084 extra temp and copy and that prevents a partial-subsumption
9085 which makes bad code. Actually we could treat
9086 component_ref's of vars like vars. */
9088 tree lhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9089 tree rhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9093 /* Check for |= or &= of a bitfield of size one into another bitfield
9094 of size 1. In this case, (unless we need the result of the
9095 assignment) we can do this more efficiently with a
9096 test followed by an assignment, if necessary.
9098 ??? At this point, we can't get a BIT_FIELD_REF here. But if
9099 things change so we do, this code should be enhanced to
9102 && TREE_CODE (lhs) == COMPONENT_REF
9103 && (TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
9104 || TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_AND_EXPR)
9105 && TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 0) == lhs
9106 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1)) == COMPONENT_REF
9107 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (lhs, 1)))
9108 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1), 1))))
9110 rtx label = gen_label_rtx ();
9112 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1),
9113 TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR ? label : 0,
9114 TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_AND_EXPR ? label : 0);
9115 expand_assignment (lhs, convert (TREE_TYPE (rhs),
9116 (TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
9118 : integer_zero_node)),
9120 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9125 temp = expand_assignment (lhs, rhs, ! ignore, original_target != 0);
9131 if (!TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
9132 expand_null_return ();
9134 expand_return (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9137 case PREINCREMENT_EXPR:
9138 case PREDECREMENT_EXPR:
9139 return expand_increment (exp, 0, ignore);
9141 case POSTINCREMENT_EXPR:
9142 case POSTDECREMENT_EXPR:
9143 /* Faster to treat as pre-increment if result is not used. */
9144 return expand_increment (exp, ! ignore, ignore);
9147 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
9149 /* Are we taking the address of a nested function? */
9150 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == FUNCTION_DECL
9151 && decl_function_context (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) != 0
9152 && ! DECL_NO_STATIC_CHAIN (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
9153 && ! TREE_STATIC (exp))
9155 op0 = trampoline_address (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9156 op0 = force_operand (op0, target);
9158 /* If we are taking the address of something erroneous, just
9160 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == ERROR_MARK)
9162 /* If we are taking the address of a constant and are at the
9163 top level, we have to use output_constant_def since we can't
9164 call force_const_mem at top level. */
9166 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == CONSTRUCTOR
9167 || (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
9169 op0 = XEXP (output_constant_def (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0), 0);
9172 /* We make sure to pass const0_rtx down if we came in with
9173 ignore set, to avoid doing the cleanups twice for something. */
9174 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
9175 ignore ? const0_rtx : NULL_RTX, VOIDmode,
9176 (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9177 ? modifier : EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS));
9179 /* If we are going to ignore the result, OP0 will have been set
9180 to const0_rtx, so just return it. Don't get confused and
9181 think we are taking the address of the constant. */
9185 /* Pass 1 for MODIFY, so that protect_from_queue doesn't get
9186 clever and returns a REG when given a MEM. */
9187 op0 = protect_from_queue (op0, 1);
9189 /* We would like the object in memory. If it is a constant, we can
9190 have it be statically allocated into memory. For a non-constant,
9191 we need to allocate some memory and store the value into it. */
9193 if (CONSTANT_P (op0))
9194 op0 = force_const_mem (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))),
9196 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == REG || GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
9197 || GET_CODE (op0) == CONCAT || GET_CODE (op0) == ADDRESSOF
9198 || GET_CODE (op0) == PARALLEL)
9200 /* If the operand is a SAVE_EXPR, we can deal with this by
9201 forcing the SAVE_EXPR into memory. */
9202 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == SAVE_EXPR)
9204 put_var_into_stack (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
9206 op0 = SAVE_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9210 /* If this object is in a register, it can't be BLKmode. */
9211 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9212 rtx memloc = assign_temp (inner_type, 1, 1, 1);
9214 if (GET_CODE (op0) == PARALLEL)
9215 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple
9216 non-contiguous locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples
9218 emit_group_store (memloc, op0,
9219 int_size_in_bytes (inner_type));
9221 emit_move_insn (memloc, op0);
9227 if (GET_CODE (op0) != MEM)
9230 mark_temp_addr_taken (op0);
9231 if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
9233 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
9234 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
9235 if (GET_MODE (op0) == Pmode && GET_MODE (op0) != mode
9236 && mode == ptr_mode)
9237 op0 = convert_memory_address (ptr_mode, op0);
9242 /* If OP0 is not aligned as least as much as the type requires, we
9243 need to make a temporary, copy OP0 to it, and take the address of
9244 the temporary. We want to use the alignment of the type, not of
9245 the operand. Note that this is incorrect for FUNCTION_TYPE, but
9246 the test for BLKmode means that can't happen. The test for
9247 BLKmode is because we never make mis-aligned MEMs with
9250 We don't need to do this at all if the machine doesn't have
9251 strict alignment. */
9252 if (STRICT_ALIGNMENT && GET_MODE (op0) == BLKmode
9253 && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
9255 && MEM_ALIGN (op0) < BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT)
9257 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9260 if (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (inner_type))
9263 if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (inner_type))
9265 /* We can't make a bitwise copy of this object, so fail. */
9266 error ("cannot take the address of an unaligned member");
9270 new = assign_stack_temp_for_type
9271 (TYPE_MODE (inner_type),
9272 MEM_SIZE (op0) ? INTVAL (MEM_SIZE (op0))
9273 : int_size_in_bytes (inner_type),
9274 1, build_qualified_type (inner_type,
9275 (TYPE_QUALS (inner_type)
9276 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST)));
9278 emit_block_move (new, op0, expr_size (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)),
9279 (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9280 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
9285 op0 = force_operand (XEXP (op0, 0), target);
9289 && GET_CODE (op0) != REG
9290 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9291 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9292 && modifier != EXPAND_SUM)
9293 op0 = force_reg (Pmode, op0);
9295 if (GET_CODE (op0) == REG
9296 && ! REG_USERVAR_P (op0))
9297 mark_reg_pointer (op0, TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (type)));
9299 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
9300 if (GET_MODE (op0) == Pmode && GET_MODE (op0) != mode
9301 && mode == ptr_mode)
9302 op0 = convert_memory_address (ptr_mode, op0);
9307 case ENTRY_VALUE_EXPR:
9310 /* COMPLEX type for Extended Pascal & Fortran */
9313 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
9316 /* Get the rtx code of the operands. */
9317 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
9318 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
9321 target = gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
9325 /* Move the real (op0) and imaginary (op1) parts to their location. */
9326 emit_move_insn (gen_realpart (mode, target), op0);
9327 emit_move_insn (gen_imagpart (mode, target), op1);
9329 insns = get_insns ();
9332 /* Complex construction should appear as a single unit. */
9333 /* If TARGET is a CONCAT, we got insns like RD = RS, ID = IS,
9334 each with a separate pseudo as destination.
9335 It's not correct for flow to treat them as a unit. */
9336 if (GET_CODE (target) != CONCAT)
9337 emit_no_conflict_block (insns, target, op0, op1, NULL_RTX);
9345 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
9346 return gen_realpart (mode, op0);
9349 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
9350 return gen_imagpart (mode, op0);
9354 enum machine_mode partmode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
9358 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
9361 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
9365 /* Store the realpart and the negated imagpart to target. */
9366 emit_move_insn (gen_realpart (partmode, target),
9367 gen_realpart (partmode, op0));
9369 imag_t = gen_imagpart (partmode, target);
9370 temp = expand_unop (partmode,
9371 ! unsignedp && flag_trapv
9372 && (GET_MODE_CLASS(partmode) == MODE_INT)
9373 ? negv_optab : neg_optab,
9374 gen_imagpart (partmode, op0), imag_t, 0);
9376 emit_move_insn (imag_t, temp);
9378 insns = get_insns ();
9381 /* Conjugate should appear as a single unit
9382 If TARGET is a CONCAT, we got insns like RD = RS, ID = - IS,
9383 each with a separate pseudo as destination.
9384 It's not correct for flow to treat them as a unit. */
9385 if (GET_CODE (target) != CONCAT)
9386 emit_no_conflict_block (insns, target, op0, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
9393 case TRY_CATCH_EXPR:
9395 tree handler = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9397 expand_eh_region_start ();
9399 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
9401 expand_eh_region_end_cleanup (handler);
9406 case TRY_FINALLY_EXPR:
9408 tree try_block = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9409 tree finally_block = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9411 if (!optimize || unsafe_for_reeval (finally_block) > 1)
9413 /* In this case, wrapping FINALLY_BLOCK in an UNSAVE_EXPR
9414 is not sufficient, so we cannot expand the block twice.
9415 So we play games with GOTO_SUBROUTINE_EXPR to let us
9416 expand the thing only once. */
9417 /* When not optimizing, we go ahead with this form since
9418 (1) user breakpoints operate more predictably without
9419 code duplication, and
9420 (2) we're not running any of the global optimizers
9421 that would explode in time/space with the highly
9422 connected CFG created by the indirect branching. */
9424 rtx finally_label = gen_label_rtx ();
9425 rtx done_label = gen_label_rtx ();
9426 rtx return_link = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
9427 tree cleanup = build (GOTO_SUBROUTINE_EXPR, void_type_node,
9428 (tree) finally_label, (tree) return_link);
9429 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (cleanup) = 1;
9431 /* Start a new binding layer that will keep track of all cleanup
9432 actions to be performed. */
9433 expand_start_bindings (2);
9434 target_temp_slot_level = temp_slot_level;
9436 expand_decl_cleanup (NULL_TREE, cleanup);
9437 op0 = expand_expr (try_block, target, tmode, modifier);
9439 preserve_temp_slots (op0);
9440 expand_end_bindings (NULL_TREE, 0, 0);
9441 emit_jump (done_label);
9442 emit_label (finally_label);
9443 expand_expr (finally_block, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
9444 emit_indirect_jump (return_link);
9445 emit_label (done_label);
9449 expand_start_bindings (2);
9450 target_temp_slot_level = temp_slot_level;
9452 expand_decl_cleanup (NULL_TREE, finally_block);
9453 op0 = expand_expr (try_block, target, tmode, modifier);
9455 preserve_temp_slots (op0);
9456 expand_end_bindings (NULL_TREE, 0, 0);
9462 case GOTO_SUBROUTINE_EXPR:
9464 rtx subr = (rtx) TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9465 rtx return_link = *(rtx *) &TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9466 rtx return_address = gen_label_rtx ();
9467 emit_move_insn (return_link,
9468 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode, return_address));
9470 emit_label (return_address);
9475 return expand_builtin_va_arg (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), type);
9478 return get_exception_pointer (cfun);
9481 /* Function descriptors are not valid except for as
9482 initialization constants, and should not be expanded. */
9486 return (*lang_hooks.expand_expr) (exp, original_target, tmode, modifier);
9489 /* Here to do an ordinary binary operator, generating an instruction
9490 from the optab already placed in `this_optab'. */
9492 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
9494 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
9495 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
9497 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
9499 temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target,
9500 unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
9506 /* Subroutine of above: returns 1 if OFFSET corresponds to an offset that
9507 when applied to the address of EXP produces an address known to be
9508 aligned more than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
9511 is_aligning_offset (offset, exp)
9515 /* Strip off any conversions and WITH_RECORD_EXPR nodes. */
9516 while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR
9517 || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR
9518 || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR
9519 || TREE_CODE (offset) == WITH_RECORD_EXPR)
9520 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9522 /* We must now have a BIT_AND_EXPR with a constant that is one less than
9523 power of 2 and which is larger than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
9524 if (TREE_CODE (offset) != BIT_AND_EXPR
9525 || !host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1), 1)
9526 || compare_tree_int (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1), BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT) <= 0
9527 || !exact_log2 (tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1), 1) + 1) < 0)
9530 /* Look at the first operand of BIT_AND_EXPR and strip any conversion.
9531 It must be NEGATE_EXPR. Then strip any more conversions. */
9532 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9533 while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR
9534 || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR
9535 || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR)
9536 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9538 if (TREE_CODE (offset) != NEGATE_EXPR)
9541 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9542 while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR
9543 || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR
9544 || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR)
9545 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9547 /* This must now be the address either of EXP or of a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR
9548 whose type is the same as EXP. */
9549 return (TREE_CODE (offset) == ADDR_EXPR
9550 && (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0) == exp
9551 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0)) == PLACEHOLDER_EXPR
9552 && (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0))
9553 == TREE_TYPE (exp)))));
9556 /* Return the tree node if an ARG corresponds to a string constant or zero
9557 if it doesn't. If we return nonzero, set *PTR_OFFSET to the offset
9558 in bytes within the string that ARG is accessing. The type of the
9559 offset will be `sizetype'. */
9562 string_constant (arg, ptr_offset)
9568 if (TREE_CODE (arg) == ADDR_EXPR
9569 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == STRING_CST)
9571 *ptr_offset = size_zero_node;
9572 return TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
9574 else if (TREE_CODE (arg) == PLUS_EXPR)
9576 tree arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
9577 tree arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 1);
9582 if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == ADDR_EXPR
9583 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0)) == STRING_CST)
9585 *ptr_offset = convert (sizetype, arg1);
9586 return TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0);
9588 else if (TREE_CODE (arg1) == ADDR_EXPR
9589 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0)) == STRING_CST)
9591 *ptr_offset = convert (sizetype, arg0);
9592 return TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0);
9599 /* Expand code for a post- or pre- increment or decrement
9600 and return the RTX for the result.
9601 POST is 1 for postinc/decrements and 0 for preinc/decrements. */
9604 expand_increment (exp, post, ignore)
9610 tree incremented = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9611 optab this_optab = add_optab;
9613 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
9614 int op0_is_copy = 0;
9615 int single_insn = 0;
9616 /* 1 means we can't store into OP0 directly,
9617 because it is a subreg narrower than a word,
9618 and we don't dare clobber the rest of the word. */
9621 /* Stabilize any component ref that might need to be
9622 evaluated more than once below. */
9624 || TREE_CODE (incremented) == BIT_FIELD_REF
9625 || (TREE_CODE (incremented) == COMPONENT_REF
9626 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (incremented, 0)) != INDIRECT_REF
9627 || DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_OPERAND (incremented, 1)))))
9628 incremented = stabilize_reference (incremented);
9629 /* Nested *INCREMENT_EXPRs can happen in C++. We must force innermost
9630 ones into save exprs so that they don't accidentally get evaluated
9631 more than once by the code below. */
9632 if (TREE_CODE (incremented) == PREINCREMENT_EXPR
9633 || TREE_CODE (incremented) == PREDECREMENT_EXPR)
9634 incremented = save_expr (incremented);
9636 /* Compute the operands as RTX.
9637 Note whether OP0 is the actual lvalue or a copy of it:
9638 I believe it is a copy iff it is a register or subreg
9639 and insns were generated in computing it. */
9641 temp = get_last_insn ();
9642 op0 = expand_expr (incremented, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
9644 /* If OP0 is a SUBREG made for a promoted variable, we cannot increment
9645 in place but instead must do sign- or zero-extension during assignment,
9646 so we copy it into a new register and let the code below use it as
9649 Note that we can safely modify this SUBREG since it is know not to be
9650 shared (it was made by the expand_expr call above). */
9652 if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (op0))
9655 SUBREG_REG (op0) = copy_to_reg (SUBREG_REG (op0));
9659 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
9660 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) < BITS_PER_WORD)
9662 /* We cannot increment this SUBREG in place. If we are
9663 post-incrementing, get a copy of the old value. Otherwise,
9664 just mark that we cannot increment in place. */
9666 op0 = copy_to_reg (op0);
9671 op0_is_copy = ((GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (op0) == REG)
9672 && temp != get_last_insn ());
9673 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
9675 /* Decide whether incrementing or decrementing. */
9676 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == POSTDECREMENT_EXPR
9677 || TREE_CODE (exp) == PREDECREMENT_EXPR)
9678 this_optab = sub_optab;
9680 /* Convert decrement by a constant into a negative increment. */
9681 if (this_optab == sub_optab
9682 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
9684 op1 = GEN_INT (-INTVAL (op1));
9685 this_optab = add_optab;
9688 if (TYPE_TRAP_SIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
9689 this_optab = this_optab == add_optab ? addv_optab : subv_optab;
9691 /* For a preincrement, see if we can do this with a single instruction. */
9694 icode = (int) this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
9695 if (icode != (int) CODE_FOR_nothing
9696 /* Make sure that OP0 is valid for operands 0 and 1
9697 of the insn we want to queue. */
9698 && (*insn_data[icode].operand[0].predicate) (op0, mode)
9699 && (*insn_data[icode].operand[1].predicate) (op0, mode)
9700 && (*insn_data[icode].operand[2].predicate) (op1, mode))
9704 /* If OP0 is not the actual lvalue, but rather a copy in a register,
9705 then we cannot just increment OP0. We must therefore contrive to
9706 increment the original value. Then, for postincrement, we can return
9707 OP0 since it is a copy of the old value. For preincrement, expand here
9708 unless we can do it with a single insn.
9710 Likewise if storing directly into OP0 would clobber high bits
9711 we need to preserve (bad_subreg). */
9712 if (op0_is_copy || (!post && !single_insn) || bad_subreg)
9714 /* This is the easiest way to increment the value wherever it is.
9715 Problems with multiple evaluation of INCREMENTED are prevented
9716 because either (1) it is a component_ref or preincrement,
9717 in which case it was stabilized above, or (2) it is an array_ref
9718 with constant index in an array in a register, which is
9719 safe to reevaluate. */
9720 tree newexp = build (((TREE_CODE (exp) == POSTDECREMENT_EXPR
9721 || TREE_CODE (exp) == PREDECREMENT_EXPR)
9722 ? MINUS_EXPR : PLUS_EXPR),
9725 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
9727 while (TREE_CODE (incremented) == NOP_EXPR
9728 || TREE_CODE (incremented) == CONVERT_EXPR)
9730 newexp = convert (TREE_TYPE (incremented), newexp);
9731 incremented = TREE_OPERAND (incremented, 0);
9734 temp = expand_assignment (incremented, newexp, ! post && ! ignore , 0);
9735 return post ? op0 : temp;
9740 /* We have a true reference to the value in OP0.
9741 If there is an insn to add or subtract in this mode, queue it.
9742 Queueing the increment insn avoids the register shuffling
9743 that often results if we must increment now and first save
9744 the old value for subsequent use. */
9746 #if 0 /* Turned off to avoid making extra insn for indexed memref. */
9747 op0 = stabilize (op0);
9750 icode = (int) this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
9751 if (icode != (int) CODE_FOR_nothing
9752 /* Make sure that OP0 is valid for operands 0 and 1
9753 of the insn we want to queue. */
9754 && (*insn_data[icode].operand[0].predicate) (op0, mode)
9755 && (*insn_data[icode].operand[1].predicate) (op0, mode))
9757 if (! (*insn_data[icode].operand[2].predicate) (op1, mode))
9758 op1 = force_reg (mode, op1);
9760 return enqueue_insn (op0, GEN_FCN (icode) (op0, op0, op1));
9762 if (icode != (int) CODE_FOR_nothing && GET_CODE (op0) == MEM)
9764 rtx addr = (general_operand (XEXP (op0, 0), mode)
9765 ? force_reg (Pmode, XEXP (op0, 0))
9766 : copy_to_reg (XEXP (op0, 0)));
9769 op0 = replace_equiv_address (op0, addr);
9770 temp = force_reg (GET_MODE (op0), op0);
9771 if (! (*insn_data[icode].operand[2].predicate) (op1, mode))
9772 op1 = force_reg (mode, op1);
9774 /* The increment queue is LIFO, thus we have to `queue'
9775 the instructions in reverse order. */
9776 enqueue_insn (op0, gen_move_insn (op0, temp));
9777 result = enqueue_insn (temp, GEN_FCN (icode) (temp, temp, op1));
9782 /* Preincrement, or we can't increment with one simple insn. */
9784 /* Save a copy of the value before inc or dec, to return it later. */
9785 temp = value = copy_to_reg (op0);
9787 /* Arrange to return the incremented value. */
9788 /* Copy the rtx because expand_binop will protect from the queue,
9789 and the results of that would be invalid for us to return
9790 if our caller does emit_queue before using our result. */
9791 temp = copy_rtx (value = op0);
9793 /* Increment however we can. */
9794 op1 = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, value, op1, op0,
9795 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp)), OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
9797 /* Make sure the value is stored into OP0. */
9799 emit_move_insn (op0, op1);
9804 /* Generate code to calculate EXP using a store-flag instruction
9805 and return an rtx for the result. EXP is either a comparison
9806 or a TRUTH_NOT_EXPR whose operand is a comparison.
9808 If TARGET is nonzero, store the result there if convenient.
9810 If ONLY_CHEAP is nonzero, only do this if it is likely to be very
9813 Return zero if there is no suitable set-flag instruction
9814 available on this machine.
9816 Once expand_expr has been called on the arguments of the comparison,
9817 we are committed to doing the store flag, since it is not safe to
9818 re-evaluate the expression. We emit the store-flag insn by calling
9819 emit_store_flag, but only expand the arguments if we have a reason
9820 to believe that emit_store_flag will be successful. If we think that
9821 it will, but it isn't, we have to simulate the store-flag with a
9822 set/jump/set sequence. */
9825 do_store_flag (exp, target, mode, only_cheap)
9828 enum machine_mode mode;
9832 tree arg0, arg1, type;
9834 enum machine_mode operand_mode;
9838 enum insn_code icode;
9839 rtx subtarget = target;
9842 /* If this is a TRUTH_NOT_EXPR, set a flag indicating we must invert the
9843 result at the end. We can't simply invert the test since it would
9844 have already been inverted if it were valid. This case occurs for
9845 some floating-point comparisons. */
9847 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == TRUTH_NOT_EXPR)
9848 invert = 1, exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9850 arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9851 arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9853 /* Don't crash if the comparison was erroneous. */
9854 if (arg0 == error_mark_node || arg1 == error_mark_node)
9857 type = TREE_TYPE (arg0);
9858 operand_mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
9859 unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (type);
9861 /* We won't bother with BLKmode store-flag operations because it would mean
9862 passing a lot of information to emit_store_flag. */
9863 if (operand_mode == BLKmode)
9866 /* We won't bother with store-flag operations involving function pointers
9867 when function pointers must be canonicalized before comparisons. */
9868 #ifdef HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
9869 if (HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
9870 && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == POINTER_TYPE
9871 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
9873 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == POINTER_TYPE
9874 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))))
9875 == FUNCTION_TYPE))))
9882 /* Get the rtx comparison code to use. We know that EXP is a comparison
9883 operation of some type. Some comparisons against 1 and -1 can be
9884 converted to comparisons with zero. Do so here so that the tests
9885 below will be aware that we have a comparison with zero. These
9886 tests will not catch constants in the first operand, but constants
9887 are rarely passed as the first operand. */
9889 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
9898 if (integer_onep (arg1))
9899 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
9901 code = unsignedp ? LTU : LT;
9904 if (! unsignedp && integer_all_onesp (arg1))
9905 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = LT;
9907 code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
9910 if (! unsignedp && integer_all_onesp (arg1))
9911 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = GE;
9913 code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT;
9916 if (integer_onep (arg1))
9917 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT;
9919 code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE;
9922 case UNORDERED_EXPR:
9948 /* Put a constant second. */
9949 if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == REAL_CST || TREE_CODE (arg0) == INTEGER_CST)
9951 tem = arg0; arg0 = arg1; arg1 = tem;
9952 code = swap_condition (code);
9955 /* If this is an equality or inequality test of a single bit, we can
9956 do this by shifting the bit being tested to the low-order bit and
9957 masking the result with the constant 1. If the condition was EQ,
9958 we xor it with 1. This does not require an scc insn and is faster
9959 than an scc insn even if we have it. */
9961 if ((code == NE || code == EQ)
9962 && TREE_CODE (arg0) == BIT_AND_EXPR && integer_zerop (arg1)
9963 && integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 1)))
9965 tree inner = TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0);
9966 int bitnum = tree_log2 (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 1));
9969 /* If INNER is a right shift of a constant and it plus BITNUM does
9970 not overflow, adjust BITNUM and INNER. */
9972 if (TREE_CODE (inner) == RSHIFT_EXPR
9973 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (inner, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
9974 && TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (TREE_OPERAND (inner, 1)) == 0
9975 && bitnum < TYPE_PRECISION (type)
9976 && 0 > compare_tree_int (TREE_OPERAND (inner, 1),
9977 bitnum - TYPE_PRECISION (type)))
9979 bitnum += TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (inner, 1));
9980 inner = TREE_OPERAND (inner, 0);
9983 /* If we are going to be able to omit the AND below, we must do our
9984 operations as unsigned. If we must use the AND, we have a choice.
9985 Normally unsigned is faster, but for some machines signed is. */
9986 ops_unsignedp = (bitnum == TYPE_PRECISION (type) - 1 ? 1
9987 #ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
9988 : (LOAD_EXTEND_OP (operand_mode) == SIGN_EXTEND ? 0 : 1)
9994 if (! get_subtarget (subtarget)
9995 || GET_MODE (subtarget) != operand_mode
9996 || ! safe_from_p (subtarget, inner, 1))
9999 op0 = expand_expr (inner, subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
10002 op0 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, operand_mode, op0,
10003 size_int (bitnum), subtarget, ops_unsignedp);
10005 if (GET_MODE (op0) != mode)
10006 op0 = convert_to_mode (mode, op0, ops_unsignedp);
10008 if ((code == EQ && ! invert) || (code == NE && invert))
10009 op0 = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, op0, const1_rtx, subtarget,
10010 ops_unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
10012 /* Put the AND last so it can combine with more things. */
10013 if (bitnum != TYPE_PRECISION (type) - 1)
10014 op0 = expand_and (mode, op0, const1_rtx, subtarget);
10019 /* Now see if we are likely to be able to do this. Return if not. */
10020 if (! can_compare_p (code, operand_mode, ccp_store_flag))
10023 icode = setcc_gen_code[(int) code];
10024 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
10025 || (only_cheap && insn_data[(int) icode].operand[0].mode != mode))
10027 /* We can only do this if it is one of the special cases that
10028 can be handled without an scc insn. */
10029 if ((code == LT && integer_zerop (arg1))
10030 || (! only_cheap && code == GE && integer_zerop (arg1)))
10032 else if (BRANCH_COST >= 0
10033 && ! only_cheap && (code == NE || code == EQ)
10034 && TREE_CODE (type) != REAL_TYPE
10035 && ((abs_optab->handlers[(int) operand_mode].insn_code
10036 != CODE_FOR_nothing)
10037 || (ffs_optab->handlers[(int) operand_mode].insn_code
10038 != CODE_FOR_nothing)))
10044 if (! get_subtarget (target)
10045 || GET_MODE (subtarget) != operand_mode
10046 || ! safe_from_p (subtarget, arg1, 1))
10049 op0 = expand_expr (arg0, subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
10050 op1 = expand_expr (arg1, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
10053 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
10055 /* Pass copies of OP0 and OP1 in case they contain a QUEUED. This is safe
10056 because, if the emit_store_flag does anything it will succeed and
10057 OP0 and OP1 will not be used subsequently. */
10059 result = emit_store_flag (target, code,
10060 queued_subexp_p (op0) ? copy_rtx (op0) : op0,
10061 queued_subexp_p (op1) ? copy_rtx (op1) : op1,
10062 operand_mode, unsignedp, 1);
10067 result = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, result, const1_rtx,
10068 result, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
10072 /* If this failed, we have to do this with set/compare/jump/set code. */
10073 if (GET_CODE (target) != REG
10074 || reg_mentioned_p (target, op0) || reg_mentioned_p (target, op1))
10075 target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target));
10077 emit_move_insn (target, invert ? const0_rtx : const1_rtx);
10078 result = compare_from_rtx (op0, op1, code, unsignedp,
10079 operand_mode, NULL_RTX);
10080 if (GET_CODE (result) == CONST_INT)
10081 return (((result == const0_rtx && ! invert)
10082 || (result != const0_rtx && invert))
10083 ? const0_rtx : const1_rtx);
10085 /* The code of RESULT may not match CODE if compare_from_rtx
10086 decided to swap its operands and reverse the original code.
10088 We know that compare_from_rtx returns either a CONST_INT or
10089 a new comparison code, so it is safe to just extract the
10090 code from RESULT. */
10091 code = GET_CODE (result);
10093 label = gen_label_rtx ();
10094 if (bcc_gen_fctn[(int) code] == 0)
10097 emit_jump_insn ((*bcc_gen_fctn[(int) code]) (label));
10098 emit_move_insn (target, invert ? const1_rtx : const0_rtx);
10099 emit_label (label);
10105 /* Stubs in case we haven't got a casesi insn. */
10106 #ifndef HAVE_casesi
10107 # define HAVE_casesi 0
10108 # define gen_casesi(a, b, c, d, e) (0)
10109 # define CODE_FOR_casesi CODE_FOR_nothing
10112 /* If the machine does not have a case insn that compares the bounds,
10113 this means extra overhead for dispatch tables, which raises the
10114 threshold for using them. */
10115 #ifndef CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
10116 #define CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD (HAVE_casesi ? 4 : 5)
10117 #endif /* CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD */
10120 case_values_threshold ()
10122 return CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD;
10125 /* Attempt to generate a casesi instruction. Returns 1 if successful,
10126 0 otherwise (i.e. if there is no casesi instruction). */
10128 try_casesi (index_type, index_expr, minval, range,
10129 table_label, default_label)
10130 tree index_type, index_expr, minval, range;
10131 rtx table_label ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
10134 enum machine_mode index_mode = SImode;
10135 int index_bits = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode);
10136 rtx op1, op2, index;
10137 enum machine_mode op_mode;
10142 /* Convert the index to SImode. */
10143 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (index_type)) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode))
10145 enum machine_mode omode = TYPE_MODE (index_type);
10146 rtx rangertx = expand_expr (range, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
10148 /* We must handle the endpoints in the original mode. */
10149 index_expr = build (MINUS_EXPR, index_type,
10150 index_expr, minval);
10151 minval = integer_zero_node;
10152 index = expand_expr (index_expr, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
10153 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (rangertx, index, LTU, NULL_RTX,
10154 omode, 1, default_label);
10155 /* Now we can safely truncate. */
10156 index = convert_to_mode (index_mode, index, 0);
10160 if (TYPE_MODE (index_type) != index_mode)
10162 index_expr = convert ((*lang_hooks.types.type_for_size)
10163 (index_bits, 0), index_expr);
10164 index_type = TREE_TYPE (index_expr);
10167 index = expand_expr (index_expr, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
10170 index = protect_from_queue (index, 0);
10171 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
10173 op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[0].mode;
10174 if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[0].predicate)
10176 index = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, index);
10178 op1 = expand_expr (minval, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
10180 op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[1].mode;
10181 op1 = convert_modes (op_mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (minval)),
10182 op1, TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (minval)));
10183 if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[1].predicate)
10185 op1 = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, op1);
10187 op2 = expand_expr (range, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
10189 op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[2].mode;
10190 op2 = convert_modes (op_mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (range)),
10191 op2, TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (range)));
10192 if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[2].predicate)
10194 op2 = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, op2);
10196 emit_jump_insn (gen_casesi (index, op1, op2,
10197 table_label, default_label));
10201 /* Attempt to generate a tablejump instruction; same concept. */
10202 #ifndef HAVE_tablejump
10203 #define HAVE_tablejump 0
10204 #define gen_tablejump(x, y) (0)
10207 /* Subroutine of the next function.
10209 INDEX is the value being switched on, with the lowest value
10210 in the table already subtracted.
10211 MODE is its expected mode (needed if INDEX is constant).
10212 RANGE is the length of the jump table.
10213 TABLE_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx for the table itself.
10215 DEFAULT_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx to jump to if the
10216 index value is out of range. */
10219 do_tablejump (index, mode, range, table_label, default_label)
10220 rtx index, range, table_label, default_label;
10221 enum machine_mode mode;
10225 if (INTVAL (range) > cfun->max_jumptable_ents)
10226 cfun->max_jumptable_ents = INTVAL (range);
10228 /* Do an unsigned comparison (in the proper mode) between the index
10229 expression and the value which represents the length of the range.
10230 Since we just finished subtracting the lower bound of the range
10231 from the index expression, this comparison allows us to simultaneously
10232 check that the original index expression value is both greater than
10233 or equal to the minimum value of the range and less than or equal to
10234 the maximum value of the range. */
10236 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index, range, GTU, NULL_RTX, mode, 1,
10239 /* If index is in range, it must fit in Pmode.
10240 Convert to Pmode so we can index with it. */
10242 index = convert_to_mode (Pmode, index, 1);
10244 /* Don't let a MEM slip thru, because then INDEX that comes
10245 out of PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS won't be a valid address,
10246 and break_out_memory_refs will go to work on it and mess it up. */
10247 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
10248 if (flag_pic && GET_CODE (index) != REG)
10249 index = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, index);
10252 /* If flag_force_addr were to affect this address
10253 it could interfere with the tricky assumptions made
10254 about addresses that contain label-refs,
10255 which may be valid only very near the tablejump itself. */
10256 /* ??? The only correct use of CASE_VECTOR_MODE is the one inside the
10257 GET_MODE_SIZE, because this indicates how large insns are. The other
10258 uses should all be Pmode, because they are addresses. This code
10259 could fail if addresses and insns are not the same size. */
10260 index = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
10261 gen_rtx_MULT (Pmode, index,
10262 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (CASE_VECTOR_MODE))),
10263 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode, table_label));
10264 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
10266 index = PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS (index);
10269 index = memory_address_noforce (CASE_VECTOR_MODE, index);
10270 temp = gen_reg_rtx (CASE_VECTOR_MODE);
10271 vector = gen_rtx_MEM (CASE_VECTOR_MODE, index);
10272 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (vector) = 1;
10273 MEM_NOTRAP_P (vector) = 1;
10274 convert_move (temp, vector, 0);
10276 emit_jump_insn (gen_tablejump (temp, table_label));
10278 /* If we are generating PIC code or if the table is PC-relative, the
10279 table and JUMP_INSN must be adjacent, so don't output a BARRIER. */
10280 if (! CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE && ! flag_pic)
10285 try_tablejump (index_type, index_expr, minval, range,
10286 table_label, default_label)
10287 tree index_type, index_expr, minval, range;
10288 rtx table_label, default_label;
10292 if (! HAVE_tablejump)
10295 index_expr = fold (build (MINUS_EXPR, index_type,
10296 convert (index_type, index_expr),
10297 convert (index_type, minval)));
10298 index = expand_expr (index_expr, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
10300 index = protect_from_queue (index, 0);
10301 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
10303 do_tablejump (index, TYPE_MODE (index_type),
10304 convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (index_type),
10305 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (range)),
10306 expand_expr (range, NULL_RTX,
10308 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (range))),
10309 table_label, default_label);
10313 /* Nonzero if the mode is a valid vector mode for this architecture.
10314 This returns nonzero even if there is no hardware support for the
10315 vector mode, but we can emulate with narrower modes. */
10318 vector_mode_valid_p (mode)
10319 enum machine_mode mode;
10321 enum mode_class class = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode);
10322 enum machine_mode innermode;
10324 /* Doh! What's going on? */
10325 if (class != MODE_VECTOR_INT
10326 && class != MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT)
10329 /* Hardware support. Woo hoo! */
10330 if (VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P (mode))
10333 innermode = GET_MODE_INNER (mode);
10335 /* We should probably return 1 if requesting V4DI and we have no DI,
10336 but we have V2DI, but this is probably very unlikely. */
10338 /* If we have support for the inner mode, we can safely emulate it.
10339 We may not have V2DI, but me can emulate with a pair of DIs. */
10340 return mov_optab->handlers[innermode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing;
10343 /* Return a CONST_VECTOR rtx for a VECTOR_CST tree. */
10345 const_vector_from_tree (exp)
10351 enum machine_mode inner, mode;
10353 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
10355 if (is_zeros_p (exp))
10356 return CONST0_RTX (mode);
10358 units = GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode);
10359 inner = GET_MODE_INNER (mode);
10361 v = rtvec_alloc (units);
10363 link = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (exp);
10364 for (i = 0; link; link = TREE_CHAIN (link), ++i)
10366 elt = TREE_VALUE (link);
10368 if (TREE_CODE (elt) == REAL_CST)
10369 RTVEC_ELT (v, i) = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (elt),
10372 RTVEC_ELT (v, i) = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (elt),
10373 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (elt),
10377 return gen_rtx_raw_CONST_VECTOR (mode, v);
10380 #include "gt-expr.h"